Quotations.ch
  Directory : The Pilgrim's Progress
GUIDE SUPPORT US BLOG
  • The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Pilgrim's Progress, by John Bunyan
  • This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
  • almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
  • re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
  • with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.net
  • Title: The Pilgrim's Progress
  • From this world to that which is to come.
  • Author: John Bunyan
  • Release Date: June 12, 2008 [EBook #131]
  • Language: English
  • *** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS ***
  • Produced by SeeWei Toh and Alan R. Light. HTML version by Al Haines.
  • Notes:
  • 1. Legends: = Sidenotes [Bible reference] = Bible references
  • 2. Sections are numbered for future reference. These sections
  • have been chosen arbitrarily, i.e., {1}, {2}
  • 3. This is 'Part 1', but is a complete work in itself. Bunyan
  • wrote a sequel ('Part 2') some years after the first part, hence
  • the 'Parts'.
  • THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
  • From This World To That Which Is To Come
  • by
  • John Bunyan
  • Part One
  • DELIVERED UNDER THE SIMILITUDE OF A DREAM BY JOHN BUNYAN
  • The Author's Apology for his Book
  • {1} When at the first I took my pen in hand
  • Thus for to write, I did not understand
  • That I at all should make a little book
  • In such a mode; nay, I had undertook
  • To make another; which, when almost done,
  • Before I was aware, I this begun.
  • And thus it was: I, writing of the way
  • And race of saints, in this our gospel day,
  • Fell suddenly into an allegory
  • About their journey, and the way to glory,
  • In more than twenty things which I set down.
  • This done, I twenty more had in my crown;
  • And they again began to multiply,
  • Like sparks that from the coals of fire do fly.
  • Nay, then, thought I, if that you breed so fast,
  • I'll put you by yourselves, lest you at last
  • Should prove ad infinitum, and eat out
  • The book that I already am about.
  • Well, so I did; but yet I did not think
  • To shew to all the world my pen and ink
  • In such a mode; I only thought to make
  • I knew not what; nor did I undertake
  • Thereby to please my neighbour: no, not I;
  • I did it my own self to gratify.
  • {2} Neither did I but vacant seasons spend
  • In this my scribble; nor did I intend
  • But to divert myself in doing this
  • From worser thoughts which make me do amiss.
  • Thus, I set pen to paper with delight,
  • And quickly had my thoughts in black and white.
  • For, having now my method by the end,
  • Still as I pulled, it came; and so I penned
  • It down: until it came at last to be,
  • For length and breadth, the bigness which you see.
  • Well, when I had thus put mine ends together,
  • I shewed them others, that I might see whether
  • They would condemn them, or them justify:
  • And some said, Let them live; some, Let them die;
  • Some said, JOHN, print it; others said, Not so;
  • Some said, It might do good; others said, No.
  • Now was I in a strait, and did not see
  • Which was the best thing to be done by me:
  • At last I thought, Since you are thus divided,
  • I print it will, and so the case decided.
  • {3} For, thought I, some, I see, would have it done,
  • Though others in that channel do not run:
  • To prove, then, who advised for the best,
  • Thus I thought fit to put it to the test.
  • I further thought, if now I did deny
  • Those that would have it, thus to gratify.
  • I did not know but hinder them I might
  • Of that which would to them be great delight.
  • For those which were not for its coming forth,
  • I said to them, Offend you I am loth,
  • Yet, since your brethren pleased with it be,
  • Forbear to judge till you do further see.
  • If that thou wilt not read, let it alone;
  • Some love the meat, some love to pick the bone.
  • Yea, that I might them better palliate,
  • I did too with them thus expostulate:--
  • {4} May I not write in such a style as this?
  • In such a method, too, and yet not miss
  • My end--thy good? Why may it not be done?
  • Dark clouds bring waters, when the bright bring none.
  • Yea, dark or bright, if they their silver drops
  • Cause to descend, the earth, by yielding crops,
  • Gives praise to both, and carpeth not at either,
  • But treasures up the fruit they yield together;
  • Yea, so commixes both, that in her fruit
  • None can distinguish this from that: they suit
  • Her well when hungry; but, if she be full,
  • She spews out both, and makes their blessings null.
  • You see the ways the fisherman doth take
  • To catch the fish; what engines doth he make?
  • Behold how he engageth all his wits;
  • Also his snares, lines, angles, hooks, and nets;
  • Yet fish there be, that neither hook, nor line,
  • Nor snare, nor net, nor engine can make thine:
  • They must be groped for, and be tickled too,
  • Or they will not be catch'd, whate'er you do.
  • How does the fowler seek to catch his game
  • By divers means! all which one cannot name:
  • His guns, his nets, his lime-twigs, light, and bell:
  • He creeps, he goes, he stands; yea, who can tell
  • Of all his postures? Yet there's none of these
  • Will make him master of what fowls he please.
  • Yea, he must pipe and whistle to catch this,
  • Yet, if he does so, that bird he will miss.
  • If that a pearl may in a toad's head dwell,
  • And may be found too in an oyster-shell;
  • If things that promise nothing do contain
  • What better is than gold; who will disdain,
  • That have an inkling of it, there to look,
  • That they may find it? Now, my little book,
  • (Though void of all these paintings that may make
  • It with this or the other man to take)
  • Is not without those things that do excel
  • What do in brave but empty notions dwell.
  • {5} 'Well, yet I am not fully satisfied,
  • That this your book will stand, when soundly tried.'
  • Why, what's the matter? 'It is dark.' What though?
  • 'But it is feigned.' What of that? I trow?
  • Some men, by feigned words, as dark as mine,
  • Make truth to spangle and its rays to shine.
  • 'But they want solidness.' Speak, man, thy mind.
  • 'They drown the weak; metaphors make us blind.'
  • Solidity, indeed, becomes the pen
  • Of him that writeth things divine to men;
  • But must I needs want solidness, because
  • By metaphors I speak? Were not God's laws,
  • His gospel laws, in olden times held forth
  • By types, shadows, and metaphors? Yet loth
  • Will any sober man be to find fault
  • With them, lest he be found for to assault
  • The highest wisdom. No, he rather stoops,
  • And seeks to find out what by pins and loops,
  • By calves and sheep, by heifers and by rams,
  • By birds and herbs, and by the blood of lambs,
  • God speaketh to him; and happy is he
  • That finds the light and grace that in them be.
  • {6} Be not too forward, therefore, to conclude
  • That I want solidness--that I am rude;
  • All things solid in show not solid be;
  • All things in parables despise not we;
  • Lest things most hurtful lightly we receive,
  • And things that good are, of our souls bereave.
  • My dark and cloudy words, they do but hold
  • The truth, as cabinets enclose the gold.
  • The prophets used much by metaphors
  • To set forth truth; yea, who so considers Christ,
  • his apostles too, shall plainly see,
  • That truths to this day in such mantles be.
  • Am I afraid to say, that holy writ,
  • Which for its style and phrase puts down all wit,
  • Is everywhere so full of all these things--
  • Dark figures, allegories? Yet there springs
  • From that same book that lustre, and those rays
  • Of light, that turn our darkest nights to days.
  • {7} Come, let my carper to his life now look,
  • And find there darker lines than in my book
  • He findeth any; yea, and let him know,
  • That in his best things there are worse lines too.
  • May we but stand before impartial men,
  • To his poor one I dare adventure ten,
  • That they will take my meaning in these lines
  • Far better than his lies in silver shrines.
  • Come, truth, although in swaddling clouts, I find,
  • Informs the judgement, rectifies the mind;
  • Pleases the understanding, makes the will
  • Submit; the memory too it doth fill
  • With what doth our imaginations please;
  • Likewise it tends our troubles to appease.
  • Sound words, I know, Timothy is to use,
  • And old wives' fables he is to refuse;
  • But yet grave Paul him nowhere did forbid
  • The use of parables; in which lay hid
  • That gold, those pearls, and precious stones that were
  • Worth digging for, and that with greatest care.
  • Let me add one word more. O man of God,
  • Art thou offended? Dost thou wish I had
  • Put forth my matter in another dress?
  • Or, that I had in things been more express?
  • Three things let me propound; then I submit
  • To those that are my betters, as is fit.
  • {8} 1. I find not that I am denied the use
  • Of this my method, so I no abuse
  • Put on the words, things, readers; or be rude
  • In handling figure or similitude,
  • In application; but, all that I may,
  • Seek the advance of truth this or that way
  • Denied, did I say? Nay, I have leave
  • (Example too, and that from them that have
  • God better pleased, by their words or ways,
  • Than any man that breatheth now-a-days)
  • Thus to express my mind, thus to declare
  • Things unto thee that excellentest are.
  • 2. I find that men (as high as trees) will write
  • Dialogue-wise; yet no man doth them slight
  • For writing so: indeed, if they abuse
  • Truth, cursed be they, and the craft they use
  • To that intent; but yet let truth be free
  • To make her sallies upon thee and me,
  • Which way it pleases God; for who knows how,
  • Better than he that taught us first to plough,
  • To guide our mind and pens for his design?
  • And he makes base things usher in divine.
  • 3. I find that holy writ in many places
  • Hath semblance with this method, where the cases
  • Do call for one thing, to set forth another;
  • Use it I may, then, and yet nothing smother
  • Truth's golden beams: nay, by this method may
  • Make it cast forth its rays as light as day.
  • And now before I do put up my pen,
  • I'll shew the profit of my book, and then
  • Commit both thee and it unto that Hand
  • That pulls the strong down, and makes weak ones stand.
  • This book it chalketh out before thine eyes
  • The man that seeks the everlasting prize;
  • It shews you whence he comes, whither he goes;
  • What he leaves undone, also what he does;
  • It also shows you how he runs and runs,
  • Till he unto the gate of glory comes.
  • {9} It shows, too, who set out for life amain,
  • As if the lasting crown they would obtain;
  • Here also you may see the reason why
  • They lose their labour, and like fools do die.
  • This book will make a traveller of thee,
  • If by its counsel thou wilt ruled be;
  • It will direct thee to the Holy Land,
  • If thou wilt its directions understand:
  • Yea, it will make the slothful active be;
  • The blind also delightful things to see.
  • Art thou for something rare and profitable?
  • Wouldest thou see a truth within a fable?
  • Art thou forgetful? Wouldest thou remember
  • From New-Year's day to the last of December?
  • Then read my fancies; they will stick like burs,
  • And may be, to the helpless, comforters.
  • This book is writ in such a dialect
  • As may the minds of listless men affect:
  • It seems a novelty, and yet contains
  • Nothing but sound and honest gospel strains.
  • Wouldst thou divert thyself from melancholy?
  • Wouldst thou be pleasant, yet be far from folly?
  • Wouldst thou read riddles, and their explanation?
  • Or else be drowned in thy contemplation?
  • Dost thou love picking meat? Or wouldst thou see
  • A man in the clouds, and hear him speak to thee?
  • Wouldst thou be in a dream, and yet not sleep?
  • Or wouldst thou in a moment laugh and weep?
  • Wouldest thou lose thyself and catch no harm,
  • And find thyself again without a charm?
  • Wouldst read thyself, and read thou knowest not what,
  • And yet know whether thou art blest or not,
  • By reading the same lines? Oh, then come hither,
  • And lay my book, thy head, and heart together.
  • JOHN BUNYAN.
  • THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS
  • In the Similitude of a Dream
  • {10} As I walked through the wilderness of this world, I lighted
  • on a certain place where was a Den, and I laid me down in that
  • place to sleep: and, as I slept, I dreamed a dream. I dreamed,
  • and behold, I saw a man clothed with rags, standing in a certain
  • place, with his face from his own house, a book in his hand, and
  • a great burden upon his back. [Isa. 64:6; Luke 14:33; Ps. 38:4;
  • Hab. 2:2; Acts 16:30,31] I looked, and saw him open the book,
  • and read therein; and, as he read, he wept, and trembled; and, not
  • being able longer to contain, he brake out with a lamentable cry,
  • saying, "What shall I do?" [Acts 2:37]
  • {11} In this plight, therefore, he went home and refrained himself
  • as long as he could, that his wife and children should not perceive
  • his distress; but he could not be silent long, because that his
  • trouble increased. Wherefore at length he brake his mind to his
  • wife and children; and thus he began to talk to them: O my dear
  • wife, said he, and you the children of my bowels, I, your dear
  • friend, am in myself undone by reason of a burden that lieth hard
  • upon me; moreover, I am for certain informed that this our city
  • will be burned with fire from heaven; in which fearful overthrow,
  • both myself, with thee my wife, and you my sweet babes, shall
  • miserably come to ruin, except (the which yet I see not) some way
  • of escape can be found, whereby we may be delivered. At this his
  • relations were sore amazed; not for that they believed that what
  • he had said to them was true, but because they thought that some
  • frenzy distemper had got into his head; therefore, it drawing
  • towards night, and they hoping that sleep might settle his brains,
  • with all haste they got him to bed. But the night was as troublesome
  • to him as the day; wherefore, instead of sleeping, he spent it in
  • sighs and tears. So, when the morning was come, they would know
  • how he did. He told them, Worse and worse: he also set to talking
  • to them again; but they began to be hardened. They also thought
  • to drive away his distemper by harsh and surly carriages to
  • him; sometimes they would deride, sometimes they would chide, and
  • sometimes they would quite neglect him. Wherefore he began to
  • retire himself to his chamber, to pray for and pity them, and also
  • to condole his own misery; he would also walk solitarily in the
  • fields, sometimes reading, and sometimes praying: and thus for
  • some days he spent his time.
  • {12} Now, I saw, upon a time, when he was walking in the fields,
  • that he was, as he was wont, reading in his book, and greatly
  • distressed in his mind; and, as he read, he burst out, as he had
  • done before, crying, "What shall I do to be saved?"
  • {13} I saw also that he looked this way and that way, as if he
  • would run; yet he stood still, because, as I perceived, he could
  • not tell which way to go. I looked then, and saw a man named
  • Evangelist coming to him and asked, Wherefore dost thou cry? [Job
  • 33:23]
  • {14} He answered, Sir, I perceive by the book in my hand, that
  • I am condemned to die, and after that to come to judgement [Heb.
  • 9:27]; and I find that I am not willing to do the first [Job 16:21],
  • nor able to do the second. [Ezek. 22:14]
  • CHRISTIAN no sooner leaves the World but meets EVANGELIST, who
  • lovingly him greets With tidings of another: and doth show Him
  • how to mount to that from this below.
  • {15} Then said Evangelist, Why not willing to die, since this life
  • is attended with so many evils? The man answered, Because I fear
  • that this burden is upon my back will sink me lower than the grave,
  • and I shall fall into Tophet. [Isa. 30:33] And, Sir, if I be not
  • fit to go to prison, I am not fit, I am sure, to go to judgement,
  • and from thence to execution; and the thoughts of these things make
  • me cry.
  • {16} Then said Evangelist, If this be thy condition, why standest
  • thou still? He answered, Because I know not whither to go. Then
  • he gave him a parchment roll, and there was written within, Flee
  • from the wrath to come. [Matt. 3.7]
  • {17} The man therefore read it, and looking upon Evangelist
  • very carefully, said, Whither must I fly? Then said Evangelist,
  • pointing with his finger over a very wide field, Do you see yonder
  • wicket-gate? [Matt. 7:13,14] The man said, No. Then said the other,
  • Do you see yonder shining light? [Ps. 119:105; 2 Pet. 1:19] He
  • said, I think I do. Then said Evangelist, Keep that light in your
  • eye, and go up directly thereto: so shalt thou see the gate; at
  • which, when thou knockest, it shall be told thee what thou shalt
  • do.
  • {18} So I saw in my dream that the man began to run.
  • Now, he had not run far from his own door, but his wife and children,
  • perceiving it, began to cry after him to return; but the man put
  • his fingers in his ears, and ran on, crying, Life! life! eternal
  • life! [Luke 14:26] So he looked not behind him, but fled towards
  • the middle of the plain. [Gen. 19:17]
  • {19} The neighbours also came out to see him run [Jer. 20:10];
  • and, as he ran, some mocked, others threatened, and some cried
  • after him to return; and, among those that did so, there were two
  • that resolved to fetch him back by force. The name of the one was
  • Obstinate and the name of the other Pliable. Now, by this time,
  • the man was got a good distance from them; but, however, they were
  • resolved to pursue him, which they did, and in a little time they
  • overtook him. Then said the man, Neighbours, wherefore are ye come?
  • They said, To persuade you to go back with us. But he said, That
  • can by no means be; you dwell, said he, in the City of Destruction,
  • the place also where I was born: I see it to be so; and, dying
  • there, sooner or later, you will sink lower than the grave, into
  • a place that burns with fire and brimstone: be content, good
  • neighbours, and go along with me.
  • {20} OBST. What! said Obstinate, and leave our friends and our
  • comforts behind us?
  • CHR. Yes, said Christian, for that was his name, because that ALL
  • which you shall forsake is not worthy to be compared with a little
  • of that which I am seeking to enjoy [2 Cor. 4:18]; and, if you
  • will go along with me, and hold it, you shall fare as I myself;
  • for there, where I go, is enough and to spare. [Luke 15:17] Come
  • away, and prove my words.
  • {21} OBST. What are the things you seek, since you leave all the
  • world to find them?
  • CHR. I seek an inheritance incorruptible, undefiled, and that fadeth
  • not away [1 Pet. 1:4], and it is laid up in heaven, and safe there
  • [Heb. 11:16], to be bestowed, at the time appointed, on them that
  • diligently seek it. Read it so, if you will, in my book.
  • OBST. Tush! said Obstinate, away with your book; will you go back
  • with us or no?
  • CHR. No, not I, said the other, because I have laid my hand to the
  • plough. [Luke 9:62]
  • {22} OBST. Come, then, neighbour Pliable, let us turn again,
  • and go home without him; there is a company of these crazy-headed
  • coxcombs, that, when they take a fancy by the end, are wiser in
  • their own eyes than seven men that can render a reason. [Prov.
  • 26:16]
  • PLI. Then said Pliable, Don't revile; if what the good Christian
  • says is true, the things he looks after are better than ours: my
  • heart inclines to go with my neighbour.
  • OBST. What! more fools still! Be ruled by me, and go back; who
  • knows whither such a brain-sick fellow will lead you? Go back, go
  • back, and be wise.
  • {23} CHR. Nay, but do thou come with thy neighbour, Pliable; there
  • are such things to be had which I spoke of, and many more glorious
  • besides. If you believe not me, read here in this book; and for
  • the truth of what is expressed therein, behold, all is confirmed
  • by the blood of Him that made it. [Heb. 9:17-22; 13:20]
  • PLI. Well, neighbour Obstinate, said Pliable, I begin to come to a
  • point; I intend to go along with this good man, and to cast in my
  • lot with him: but, my good companion, do you know the way to this
  • desired place?
  • {24} CHR. I am directed by a man, whose name is Evangelist, to
  • speed me to a little gate that is before us, where we shall receive
  • instructions about the way.
  • PLI. Come, then, good neighbour, let us be going. Then they went
  • both together.
  • OBST. And I will go back to my place, said Obstinate; I will be no
  • companion of such misled, fantastical fellows.
  • {25} Now, I saw in my dream, that when Obstinate was gone back,
  • Christian and Pliable went talking over the plain; and thus they
  • began their discourse.
  • {26} CHR. Come, neighbour Pliable, how do you do? I am glad you
  • are persuaded to go along with me. Had even Obstinate himself
  • but felt what I have felt of the powers and terrors of what is yet
  • unseen, he would not thus lightly have given us the back.
  • PLI. Come, neighbour Christian, since there are none but us two
  • here, tell me now further what the things are, and how to be enjoyed,
  • whither we are going.
  • {27} CHR. I can better conceive of them with my mind, than speak
  • of them with my tongue. God's things unspeakable: but yet, since
  • you are desirous to know, I will read of them in my book.
  • PLI. And do you think that the words of your book are certainly
  • true?
  • CHR. Yes, verily; for it was made by Him that cannot lie. [Titus
  • 1:2]
  • PLI. Well said; what things are they?
  • CHR. There is an endless kingdom to be inhabited, and everlasting
  • life to be given us, that we may inhabit that kingdom for ever.
  • [Isa. 45:17; John 10:28,29]
  • PLI. Well said; and what else?
  • CHR. There are crowns and glory to be given us, and garments that
  • will make us shine like the sun in the firmament of heaven. [2
  • Tim. 4:8; Rev. 3:4; Matt. 13:43]
  • PLI. This is very pleasant; and what else?
  • CHR. There shall be no more crying, nor Sorrow: for He that is
  • owner of the place will wipe all tears from our eyes. [Isa. 25.6-8;
  • Rev. 7:17, 21:4]
  • {28} PLI. And what company shall we have there?
  • CHR. There we shall be with seraphims and cherubims, creatures that
  • will dazzle your eyes to look on them. [Isa. 6:2] There also you
  • shall meet with thousands and ten thousands that have gone before
  • us to that place; none of them are hurtful, but loving and holy;
  • every one walking in the sight of God, and standing in his presence
  • with acceptance for ever. [1 Thess. 4:16,17; Rev. 5:11] In a
  • word, there we shall see the elders with their golden crowns [Rev.
  • 4:4], there we shall see the holy virgins with their golden harps
  • [Rev. 14:1-5], there we shall see men that by the world were cut
  • in pieces, burnt in flames, eaten of beasts, drowned in the seas,
  • for the love that they bare to the Lord of the place, all well, and
  • clothed with immortality as with a garment. [John 12:25; 2 Cor.
  • 5:4]
  • PLI. The hearing of this is enough to ravish one's heart. But are
  • these things to be enjoyed? How shall we get to be sharers thereof?
  • CHR. The Lord, the Governor of the country, hath recorded that in
  • this book; the substance of which is, If we be truly willing to
  • have it, he will bestow it upon us freely.
  • PLI. Well, my good companion, glad am I to hear of these things:
  • come on, let us mend our pace.
  • CHR. I cannot go so fast as I would, by reason of this burden that
  • is on my back.
  • {29} Now I saw in my dream, that just as they had ended this talk
  • they drew near to a very miry slough, that was in the midst of the
  • plain; and they, being heedless, did both fall suddenly into the
  • bog. The name of the slough was Despond. Here, therefore, they
  • wallowed for a time, being grievously bedaubed with the dirt; and
  • Christian, because of the burden that was on his back, began to
  • sink in the mire.
  • {30} PLI. Then said Pliable; Ah! neighbour Christian, where are
  • you now?
  • CHR. Truly, said Christian, I do not know.
  • PLI. At this Pliable began to be offended, and angrily said to his
  • fellow, Is this the happiness you have told me all this while of?
  • If we have such ill speed at our first setting out, what may we
  • expect betwixt this and our journey's end? May I get out again
  • with my life, you shall possess the brave country alone for me.
  • And, with that, he gave a desperate struggle or two, and got out
  • of the mire on that side of the slough which was next to his own
  • house: so away he went, and Christian saw him no more.
  • {31} Wherefore Christian was left to tumble in the Slough of Despond
  • alone: but still he endeavoured to struggle to that side of the
  • slough that was still further from his own house, and next to the
  • wicket-gate; the which he did, but could not get out, because of
  • the burden that was upon his back: but I beheld in my dream, that
  • a man came to him, whose name was Help, and asked him, What he did
  • there?
  • CHR. Sir, said Christian, I was bid go this way by a man called
  • Evangelist, who directed me also to yonder gate, that I might escape
  • the wrath to come; and as I was going thither I fell in here.
  • {32} HELP. But why did not you look for the steps?
  • CHR. Fear followed me so hard, that I fled the next way, and fell
  • in.
  • HELP. Then said he, Give me thy hand: so he gave him his hand, and
  • he drew him out, and set him upon sound ground, and bid him go on
  • his way. [Ps. 40:2]
  • {33} Then I stepped to him that plucked him out, and said,
  • Sir, wherefore, since over this place is the way from the City of
  • Destruction to yonder gate, is it that this plat is not mended,
  • that poor travellers might go thither with more security? And he
  • said unto me, This miry slough is such a place as cannot be mended;
  • it is the descent whither the scum and filth that attends conviction
  • for sin doth continually run, and therefore it is called the Slough
  • of Despond; for still, as the sinner is awakened about his lost
  • condition, there ariseth in his soul many fears, and doubts, and
  • discouraging apprehensions, which all of them get together, and
  • settle in this place. And this is the reason of the badness of
  • this ground.
  • {34} It is not the pleasure of the King that this place should remain
  • so bad. [Isa. 35:3,4] His labourers also have, by the direction
  • of His Majesty's surveyors, been for above these sixteen hundred
  • years employed about this patch of ground, if perhaps it might have
  • been mended: yea, and to my knowledge, said he, here have been
  • swallowed up at least twenty thousand cart-loads, yea, millions of
  • wholesome instructions, that have at all seasons been brought from
  • all places of the King's dominions, and they that can tell, say
  • they are the best materials to make good ground of the place; if
  • so be, it might have been mended, but it is the Slough of Despond
  • still, and so will be when they have done what they can.
  • {35} True, there are, by the direction of the Law-giver, certain
  • good and substantial steps, placed even through the very midst of
  • this slough; but at such time as this place doth much spew out its
  • filth, as it doth against change of weather, these steps are hardly
  • seen; or, if they be, men, through the dizziness of their heads,
  • step beside, and then they are bemired to purpose, notwithstanding
  • the steps be there; but the ground is good when they are once got
  • in at the gate. [1 Sam. 12:23]
  • {36} Now, I saw in my dream, that by this time Pliable was got home
  • to his house again, so that his neighbours came to visit him; and
  • some of them called him wise man for coming back, and some called
  • him fool for hazarding himself with Christian: others again did mock
  • at his cowardliness; saying, Surely, since you began to venture, I
  • would not have been so base to have given out for a few difficulties.
  • So Pliable sat sneaking among them. But at last he got more
  • confidence, and then they all turned their tales, and began to
  • deride poor Christian behind his back. And thus much concerning
  • Pliable.
  • {37} Now, as Christian was walking solitarily by himself, he espied
  • one afar off, come crossing over the field to meet him; and their
  • hap was to meet just as they were crossing the way of each other.
  • The gentleman's name that met him was Mr. Worldly Wiseman, he dwelt
  • in the town of Carnal Policy, a very great town, and also hard by
  • from whence Christian came. This man, then, meeting with Christian,
  • and having some inkling of him,--for Christian's setting forth
  • from the City of Destruction was much noised abroad, not only in
  • the town where he dwelt, but also it began to be the town talk in
  • some other places,--Mr. Worldly Wiseman, therefore, having some
  • guess of him, by beholding his laborious going, by observing his
  • sighs and groans, and the like, began thus to enter into some talk
  • with Christian.
  • {38} WORLD. How now, good fellow, whither away after this burdened
  • manner?
  • CHR. A burdened manner, indeed, as ever, I think, poor creature
  • had! And whereas you ask me, Whither away? I tell you, Sir, I am
  • going to yonder wicket-gate before me; for there, as I am informed,
  • I shall be put into a way to be rid of my heavy burden.
  • WORLD. Hast thou a wife and children?
  • CHR. Yes; but I am so laden with this burden that I cannot take
  • that pleasure in them as formerly; methinks I am as if I had none.
  • [1 Cor 7:29]
  • WORLD. Wilt thou hearken unto me if I give thee counsel?
  • CHR. If it be good, I will; for I stand in need of good counsel.
  • {39} WORLD. I would advise thee, then, that thou with all speed get
  • thyself rid of thy burden; for thou wilt never be settled in thy
  • mind till then; nor canst thou enjoy the benefits of the blessing
  • which God hath bestowed upon thee till then.
  • CHR. That is that which I seek for, even to be rid of this heavy
  • burden; but get it off myself, I cannot; nor is there any man in
  • our country that can take it off my shoulders; therefore am I going
  • this way, as I told you, that I may be rid of my burden.
  • WORLD. Who bid thee go this way to be rid of thy burden?
  • CHR. A man that appeared to me to be a very great and honourable
  • person; his name, as I remember, is Evangelist.
  • {40} WORLD. I beshrew him for his counsel! there is not a more
  • dangerous and troublesome way in the world than is that unto which
  • he hath directed thee; and that thou shalt find, if thou wilt be
  • ruled by his counsel. Thou hast met with something, as I perceive,
  • already; for I see the dirt of the Slough of Despond is upon thee;
  • but that slough is the beginning of the sorrows that do attend
  • those that go on in that way. Hear me, I am older than thou; thou
  • art like to meet with, in the way which thou goest, wearisomeness,
  • painfulness, hunger, perils, nakedness, sword, lions, dragons,
  • darkness, and, in a word, death, and what not! These things are
  • certainly true, having been confirmed by many testimonies. And why
  • should a man so carelessly cast away himself, by giving heed to a
  • stranger?
  • CHR. Why, Sir, this burden upon my back is more terrible to me than
  • all these things which you have mentioned; nay, methinks I care
  • not what I meet with in the way, if so be I can also meet with
  • deliverance from my burden.
  • {41} WORLD. How camest thou by the burden at first?
  • CHR. By reading this book in my hand.
  • WORLD. I thought so; and it is happened unto thee as to other weak
  • men, who, meddling with things too high for them, do suddenly fall
  • into thy distractions; which distractions do not only unman men, as
  • thine, I perceive, have done thee, but they run them upon desperate
  • ventures to obtain they know not what.
  • CHR. I know what I would obtain; it is ease for my heavy burden.
  • {42} WORLD. But why wilt thou seek for ease this way, seeing so
  • many dangers attend it? especially since, hadst thou but patience
  • to hear me, I could direct thee to the obtaining of what thou desirest,
  • without the dangers that thou in this way wilt run thyself into;
  • yea, and the remedy is at hand. Besides, I will add, that instead
  • of those dangers, thou shalt meet with much safety, friendship,
  • and content.
  • CHR. Pray, Sir, open this secret to me.
  • {43} WORLD. Why, in yonder village--the village is named Morality--
  • there dwells a gentleman whose name is Legality, a very judicious
  • man, and a man of very good name, that has skill to help men
  • off with such burdens as thine are from their shoulders: yea, to
  • my knowledge, he hath done a great deal of good this way; ay, and
  • besides, he hath skill to cure those that are somewhat crazed in
  • their wits with their burdens. To him, as I said, thou mayest go,
  • and be helped presently. His house is not quite a mile from this
  • place, and if he should not be at home himself, he hath a pretty
  • young man to his son, whose name is Civility, that can do it (to
  • speak on) as well as the old gentleman himself; there, I say, thou
  • mayest be eased of thy burden; and if thou art not minded to go
  • back to thy former habitation, as, indeed, I would not wish thee,
  • thou mayest send for thy wife and children to thee to this village,
  • where there are houses now stand empty, one of which thou mayest
  • have at reasonable rates; provision is there also cheap and good;
  • and that which will make thy life the more happy is, to be sure,
  • there thou shalt live by honest neighbours, in credit and good
  • fashion.
  • {44} Now was Christian somewhat at a stand; but presently he concluded,
  • if this be true, which this gentleman hath said, my wisest course
  • is to take his advice; and with that he thus further spoke.
  • {45} CHR. Sir, which is my way to this honest man's house?
  • WORLD. Do you see yonder hill?
  • CHR. Yes, very well.
  • WORLD. By that hill you must go, and the first house you come at
  • is his.
  • {46} So Christian turned out of his way to go to Mr. Legality's
  • house for help; but, behold, when he was got now hard by the hill,
  • it seemed so high, and also that side of it that was next the
  • wayside did hang so much over, that Christian was afraid to venture
  • further, lest the hill should fall on his head; wherefore there he
  • stood still and wotted not what to do. Also his burden now seemed
  • heavier to him than while he was in his way. There came also
  • flashes of fire out of the hill, that made Christian afraid that
  • he should be burned. [Ex. 19:16, 18] Here, therefore, he sweat
  • and did quake for fear. [Heb. 12:21]
  • When Christians unto carnal men give ear, Out of their way they
  • go, and pay for 't dear; For Master Worldly Wiseman can but shew
  • A saint the way to bondage and to woe.
  • {47} And now he began to be sorry that he had taken Mr. Worldly
  • Wiseman's counsel. And with that he saw Evangelist coming to meet
  • him; at the sight also of whom he began to blush for shame. So
  • Evangelist drew nearer and nearer; and coming up to him, he looked
  • upon him with a severe and dreadful countenance, and thus began to
  • reason with Christian.
  • {48} EVAN. What dost thou here, Christian? said he: at which
  • words Christian knew not what to answer; wherefore at present he
  • stood speechless before him. Then said Evangelist further, Art not
  • thou the man that I found crying without the walls of the City of
  • Destruction?
  • CHR. Yes, dear Sir, I am the man.
  • EVAN. Did not I direct thee the way to the little wicket-gate?
  • CHR. Yes, dear Sir, said Christian.
  • EVAN. How is it, then, that thou art so quickly turned aside? for
  • thou art now out of the way.
  • {49} CHR. I met with a gentleman so soon as I had got over the
  • Slough of Despond, who persuaded me that I might, in the village
  • before me, find a man that would take off my burden.
  • EVAN. What was he?
  • CHR. He looked like a gentleman, and talked much to me, and got me
  • at last to yield; so I came hither; but when I beheld this hill, and
  • how it hangs over the way, I suddenly made a stand lest it should
  • fall on my head.
  • EVAN. What said that gentleman to you?
  • CHR. Why, he asked me whither I was going, and I told him.
  • EVAN. And what said he then?
  • CHR. He asked me if I had a family? And I told him. But, said I,
  • I am so loaden with the burden that is on my back, that I cannot
  • take pleasure in them as formerly.
  • EVAN. And what said he then?
  • {50} CHR. He bid me with speed get rid of my burden; and I told him
  • that it was ease that I sought. And said I, I am therefore going
  • to yonder gate, to receive further direction how I may get to the
  • place of deliverance. So he said that he would shew me a better
  • way, and short, not so attended with difficulties as the way,
  • Sir, that you set me in; which way, said he, will direct you to
  • a gentleman's house that hath skill to take off these burdens, so
  • I believed him, and turned out of that way into this, if haply I
  • might be soon eased of my burden. But when I came to this place,
  • and beheld things as they are, I stopped for fear (as I said) of
  • danger: but I now know not what to do.
  • {51} EVAN. Then, said Evangelist, stand still a little, that I
  • may show thee the words of God. So he stood trembling. Then said
  • Evangelist, "See that ye refuse not him that speaketh. For if they
  • escaped not who refused him that spake on earth, much more shall
  • not we escape, if we turn away from him that speaketh from heaven."
  • [Heb. 12:25] He said, moreover, "Now the just shall live by faith:
  • but if any man draw back, my soul shall have no pleasure in him."
  • [Heb. 10:38] He also did thus apply them: Thou art the man that
  • art running into this misery; thou hast begun to reject the counsel
  • of the Most High, and to draw back thy foot from the way of peace,
  • even almost to the hazarding of thy perdition.
  • {52} Then Christian fell down at his feet as dead, crying, "Woe
  • is me, for I am undone!" At the sight of which Evangelist caught
  • him by the right hand, saying, "All manner of sin and blasphemies
  • shall be forgiven unto men." [Matt. 12:31, Mark 3:28] "Be not
  • faithless, but believing." [John 20:27] Then did Christian again a
  • little revive, and stood up trembling, as at first, before Evangelist.
  • {53} Then Evangelist proceeded, saying, Give more earnest heed to
  • the things that I shall tell thee of. I will now show thee who it
  • was that deluded thee, and who it was also to whom he sent thee.
  • --The man that met thee is one Worldly Wiseman, and rightly is he
  • so called; partly, because he savoureth only the doctrine of this
  • world, [1 John 4:5] (therefore he always goes to the town of Morality
  • to church): and partly because he loveth that doctrine best, for
  • it saveth him best from the cross. [Gal 6:12] And because he is
  • of this carnal temper, therefore he seeketh to pervert my ways,
  • though right. Now there are three things in this man's counsel,
  • that thou must utterly abhor.
  • 1. His turning thee out of the way. 2. His labouring to render
  • the cross odious to thee. And, 3. His setting thy feet in that
  • way that leadeth unto the administration of death.
  • {54} First, Thou must abhor his turning thee out of the way; and
  • thine own consenting thereunto: because this is to reject the
  • counsel of God for the sake of the counsel of a Worldly Wiseman.
  • The Lord says, "Strive to enter in at the strait gate" [Luke 13:24],
  • the gate to which I sent thee; for "strait is the gate that leadeth
  • unto life, and few there be that find it." [Matt. 7:14] From this
  • little wicket-gate, and from the way thereto, hath this wicked man
  • turned thee, to the bringing of thee almost to destruction; hate,
  • therefore, his turning thee out of the way, and abhor thyself for
  • hearkening to him.
  • {55} Secondly, Thou must abhor his labouring to render the cross
  • odious unto thee; for thou art to prefer it "before the treasures
  • in Egypt." [Heb. 11:25,26] Besides the King of glory hath told
  • thee, that he that "will save his life shall lose it." [Mark 8:35;
  • John 12:25; Matt. 10:39] And, "He that cometh after me, and hateth
  • not his father, and mother, and wife, and children, and brethren,
  • and sisters, yea, and his own life also, he cannot be my disciple."
  • [Luke 14:26] I say, therefore, for man to labour to persuade thee,
  • that that shall be thy death, without which, THE TRUTH hath said,
  • thou canst not have eternal life; this doctrine thou must abhor.
  • {56} Thirdly, Thou must hate his setting of thy feet in the way
  • that leadeth to the ministration of death. And for this thou must
  • consider to whom he sent thee, and also how unable that person was
  • to deliver thee from thy burden.
  • {57} He to whom thou wast sent for ease, being by name Legality,
  • is the son of the bond-woman which now is, and is in bondage with
  • her children [Gal 4:21-27]; and is, in a mystery, this Mount Sinai,
  • which thou hast feared will fall on thy head. Now, if she, with
  • her children, are in bondage, how canst thou expect by them to be
  • made free? This Legality, therefore, is not able to set thee free
  • from thy burden. No man was as yet ever rid of his burden by him;
  • no, nor ever is like to be: ye cannot be justified by the works
  • of the law; for by the deeds of the law no man living can be rid
  • of his burden: therefore, Mr. Worldly Wiseman is an alien, and
  • Mr. Legality is a cheat; and for his son Civility, notwithstanding
  • his simpering looks, he is but a hypocrite and cannot help thee.
  • Believe me, there is nothing in all this noise, that thou hast
  • heard of these sottish men, but a design to beguile thee of thy
  • salvation, by turning thee from the way in which I had set thee.
  • After this, Evangelist called aloud to the heavens for confirmation
  • of what he had said: and with that there came words and fire out
  • of the mountain under which poor Christian stood, that made the
  • hair of his flesh stand up. The words were thus pronounced: 'As
  • many as are of the works of the law are under the curse; for it
  • is written, Cursed is every one that continueth not in all things
  • which are written in the book of the law to do them.' [Gal. 3:10]
  • {58} Now Christian looked for nothing but death, and began to cry
  • out lamentably; even cursing the time in which he met with Mr. Worldly
  • Wiseman; still calling himself a thousand fools for hearkening
  • to his counsel; he also was greatly ashamed to think that this
  • gentleman's arguments, flowing only from the flesh, should have
  • the prevalency with him as to cause him to forsake the right way.
  • This done, he applied himself again to Evangelist in words and
  • sense as follow:
  • {59} CHR. Sir, what think you? Is there hope? May I now go back
  • and go up to the wicket-gate? Shall I not be abandoned for this,
  • and sent back from thence ashamed? I am sorry I have hearkened to
  • this man's counsel. But may my sin be forgiven?
  • EVAN. Then said Evangelist to him, Thy sin is very great, for by
  • it thou hast committed two evils: thou hast forsaken the way that
  • is good, to tread in forbidden paths; yet will the man at the gate
  • receive thee, for he has goodwill for men; only, said he, take heed
  • that thou turn not aside again, 'lest thou perish from the way,
  • when his wrath is kindled but a little.' [Ps. 2:12] Then did
  • Christian address himself to go back; and Evangelist, after he had
  • kissed him, gave him one smile, and bid him God-speed. So he went
  • on with haste, neither spake he to any man by the way; nor, if any
  • asked him, would he vouchsafe them an answer. He went like one
  • that was all the while treading on forbidden ground, and could by
  • no means think himself safe, till again he was got into the way
  • which he left, to follow Mr. Worldly Wiseman's counsel. So, in
  • process of time, Christian got up to the gate. Now, over the gate
  • there was written, 'Knock, and it shall be opened unto you.' [Matt
  • 7:8]
  • {60} "He that will enter in must first without
  • Stand knocking at the Gate, nor need he doubt
  • That is A KNOCKER but to enter in;
  • For God can love him, and forgive his sin."
  • He knocked, therefore, more than once or twice, saying--
  • "May I now enter here? Will he within
  • Open to sorry me, though I have been
  • An undeserving rebel? Then shall I
  • Not fail to sing his lasting praise on high."
  • At last there came a grave person to the gate, named Good-will, who
  • asked who was there? and whence he came? and what he would have?
  • {61} CHR. Here is a poor burdened sinner. I come from the City of
  • Destruction, but am going to Mount Zion, that I may be delivered
  • from the wrath to come. I would therefore, Sir, since I am informed
  • that by this gate is the way thither, know if you are willing to
  • let me in?
  • GOOD-WILL. I am willing with all my heart, said he; and with that
  • he opened the gate.
  • {62} So when Christian was stepping in, the other gave him a
  • pull. Then said Christian, What means that? The other told him.
  • A little distance from this gate, there is erected a strong castle,
  • of which Beelzebub is the captain; from thence, both he and them
  • that are with him shoot arrows at those that come up to this gate,
  • if haply they may die before they can enter in.
  • Then said Christian, I rejoice and tremble. So when he was got
  • in, the man of the gate asked him who directed him thither?
  • {63} CHR. Evangelist bid me come hither, and knock, (as I did);
  • and he said that you, Sir, would tell me what I must do.
  • GOOD-WILL. An open door is set before thee, and no man can shut
  • it.
  • CHR. Now I begin to reap the benefits of my hazards.
  • GOOD-WILL. But how is it that you came alone?
  • CHR. Because none of my neighbours saw their danger, as I saw mine.
  • GOOD-WILL. Did any of them know of your coming?
  • CHR. Yes; my wife and children saw me at the first, and called
  • after me to turn again; also, some of my neighbours stood crying
  • and calling after me to return; but I put my fingers in my ears,
  • and so came on my way.
  • GOOD-WILL. But did none of them follow you, to persuade you to go
  • back?
  • CHR. Yes, both Obstinate and Pliable; but when they saw that they
  • could not prevail, Obstinate went railing back, but Pliable came
  • with me a little way.
  • GOOD-WILL. But why did he not come through?
  • {64} CHR. We, indeed, came both together, until we came at the Slough
  • of Despond, into the which we also suddenly fell. And then was
  • my neighbour, Pliable, discouraged, and would not venture further.
  • Wherefore, getting out again on that side next to his own house,
  • he told me I should possess the brave country alone for him; so he
  • went his way, and I came mine--he after Obstinate, and I to this
  • gate.
  • GOOD-WILL. Then said Good-will, Alas, poor man! is the celestial
  • glory of so small esteem with him, that he counteth it not worth
  • running the hazards of a few difficulties to obtain it?
  • {65} CHR. Truly, said Christian, I have said the truth of Pliable,
  • and if I should also say all the truth of myself, it will appear
  • there is no betterment betwixt him and myself. It is true, he went
  • back to his own house, but I also turned aside to go in the way of
  • death, being persuaded thereto by the carnal arguments of one Mr.
  • Worldly Wiseman.
  • GOOD-WILL. Oh, did he light upon you? What! he would have had you
  • a sought for ease at the hands of Mr. Legality. They are, both of
  • them, a very cheat. But did you take his counsel?
  • CHR. Yes, as far as I durst; I went to find out Mr. Legality, until
  • I thought that the mountain that stands by his house would have
  • fallen upon my head; wherefore there I was forced to stop.
  • GOOD-WILL. That mountain has been the death of many, and will be
  • the death of many more; it is well you escaped being by it dashed
  • in pieces.
  • CHR. Why, truly, I do not know what had become of me there, had
  • not Evangelist happily met me again, as I was musing in the midst
  • of my dumps; but it was God's mercy that he came to me again, for
  • else I had never come hither. But now I am come, such a one as
  • I am, more fit, indeed, for death, by that mountain, than thus to
  • stand talking with my lord; but, oh, what a favour is this to me,
  • that yet I am admitted entrance here!
  • {66} GOOD-WILL. We make no objections against any, notwithstanding
  • all that they have done before they came hither. They are in no
  • wise cast out [John vi.37]; and therefore, good Christian, come a
  • little way with me, and I will teach thee about the way thou must
  • go. Look before thee; dost thou see this narrow way? THAT is
  • the way thou must go; it was cast up by the patriarchs, prophets,
  • Christ, and his apostles; and it is as straight as a rule can make
  • it. This is the way thou must go.
  • {67} CHR. But, said Christian, are there no turnings or windings
  • by which a stranger may lose his way?
  • GOOD-WILL. Yes, there are many ways butt down upon this, and they
  • are crooked and wide. But thus thou mayest distinguish the right
  • from the wrong, the right only being straight and narrow. [Matt
  • 7:14]
  • {68} Then I saw in my dream that Christian asked him further if
  • he could not help him off with his burden that was upon his back;
  • for as yet he had not got rid thereof, nor could he by any means
  • get it off without help.
  • He told him, As to thy burden, be content to bear it, until thou
  • comest to the place of deliverance; for there it will fall from
  • thy back of itself.
  • {69} Then Christian began to gird up his loins, and to address
  • himself to his journey. So the other told him, That by that he
  • was gone some distance from the gate, he would come at the house of
  • the Interpreter, at whose door he should knock, and he would show
  • him excellent things. Then Christian took his leave of his friend,
  • and he again bid him God-speed.
  • {70} Then he went on till he came to the house of the Interpreter,
  • where he knocked over and over; at last one came to the door, and
  • asked who was there.
  • {71} CHR. Sir, here is a traveller, who was bid by an acquaintance
  • of the good-man of this house to call here for my profit; I would
  • therefore speak with the master of the house. So he called for the
  • master of the house, who, after a little time, came to Christian,
  • and asked him what he would have.
  • CHR. Sir, said Christian, I am a man that am come from the City
  • of Destruction, and am going to the Mount Zion; and I was told by
  • the man that stands at the gate, at the head of this way, that if
  • I called here, you would show me excellent things, such as would
  • be a help to me in my journey.
  • {72} INTER. Then said the Interpreter, Come in; I will show that
  • which will be profitable to thee. So he commanded his man to light
  • the candle, and bid Christian follow him: so he had him into
  • a private room, and bid his man open a door; the which when he
  • had done, Christian saw the picture of a very grave person hang
  • up against the wall; and this was the fashion of it. It had eyes
  • lifted up to heaven, the best of books in his hand, the law of
  • truth was written upon his lips, the world was behind his back.
  • It stood as if it pleaded with men, and a crown of gold did hang
  • over his head.
  • CHR. Then said Christian, What meaneth this?
  • {73} INTER. The man whose picture this is, is one of a thousand; he
  • can beget children [1 Cor. 4:15], travail in birth with children
  • [Gal. 4:19], and nurse them himself when they are born. And whereas
  • thou seest him with his eyes lift up to heaven, the best of books
  • in his hand, and the law of truth writ on his lips, it is to show
  • thee that his work is to know and unfold dark things to sinners;
  • even as also thou seest him stand as if he pleaded with men: and
  • whereas thou seest the world as cast behind him, and that a crown
  • hangs over his head, that is to show thee that slighting and
  • despising the things that are present, for the love that he hath
  • to his Master's service, he is sure in the world that comes next
  • to have glory for his reward. Now, said the Interpreter, I have
  • showed thee this picture first, because the man whose picture this
  • is, is the only man whom the Lord of the place whither thou art
  • going, hath authorised to be thy guide in all difficult places thou
  • mayest meet with in the way; wherefore, take good heed to what I
  • have shewed thee, and bear well in thy mind what thou hast seen,
  • lest in thy journey thou meet with some that pretend to lead thee
  • right, but their way goes down to death.
  • {74} Then he took him by the hand, and led him into a very large
  • parlour that was full of dust, because never swept; the which after
  • he had reviewed a little while, the Interpreter called for a man to
  • sweep. Now, when he began to sweep, the dust began so abundantly
  • to fly about, that Christian had almost therewith been choked.
  • Then said the Interpreter to a damsel that stood by, Bring hither
  • the water, and sprinkle the room; the which, when she had done, it
  • was swept and cleansed with pleasure.
  • {75} CHR. Then said Christian, What means this?
  • INTER. The Interpreter answered, This parlour is the heart of
  • a man that was never sanctified by the sweet grace of the gospel;
  • the dust is his original sin and inward corruptions, that have defiled
  • the whole man. He that began to sweep at first, is the Law; but
  • she that brought water, and did sprinkle it, is the Gospel. Now,
  • whereas thou sawest, that so soon as the first began to sweep, the
  • dust did so fly about that the room by him could not be cleansed,
  • but that thou wast almost choked therewith; this is to shew thee,
  • that the law, instead of cleansing the heart (by its working) from
  • sin, doth revive, put strength into, and increase it in the soul,
  • even as it doth discover and forbid it, for it doth not give power
  • to subdue. [Rom. 7:6; 1 Cor. 15:56; Rom. 5:20]
  • {76} Again, as thou sawest the damsel sprinkle the room with water,
  • upon which it was cleansed with pleasure; this is to show thee,
  • that when the gospel comes in the sweet and precious influences
  • thereof to the heart, then, I say, even as thou sawest the damsel
  • lay the dust by sprinkling the floor with water, so is sin vanquished
  • and subdued, and the soul made clean through the faith of it, and
  • consequently fit for the King of glory to inhabit. [John 15:3;
  • Eph. 5:26; Acts 15:9; Rom. 16:25,26; John 15:13]
  • {77} I saw, moreover, in my dream, that the Interpreter took him
  • by the hand, and had him into a little room, where sat two little
  • children, each one in his chair. The name of the eldest was
  • Passion, and the name of the other Patience. Passion seemed to
  • be much discontented; but Patience was very quiet. Then Christian
  • asked, What is the reason of the discontent of Passion? The
  • Interpreter answered, The Governor of them would have him stay for
  • his best things till the beginning of the next year; but he will
  • have all now: but Patience is willing to wait.
  • Then I saw that one came to Passion, and brought him a bag of treasure,
  • and poured it down at his feet, the which he took up and rejoiced
  • therein, and withal laughed Patience to scorn. But I beheld but a
  • while, and he had lavished all away, and had nothing left him but
  • rags.
  • {78} CHR. Then said Christian to the Interpreter, Expound this
  • matter more fully to me.
  • INTER. So he said, These two lads are figures: Passion, of the men
  • of this world; and Patience, of the men of that which is to come;
  • for as here thou seest, Passion will have all now this year, that
  • is to say, in this world; so are the men of this world, they must
  • have all their good things now, they cannot stay till next year,
  • that is until the next world, for their portion of good. That
  • proverb, 'A bird in the hand is worth two in the bush', is of more
  • authority with them than are all the Divine testimonies of the
  • good of the world to come. But as thou sawest that he had quickly
  • lavished all away, and had presently left him nothing but rags; so
  • will it be with all such men at the end of this world.
  • CHR. Then said Christian, Now I see that Patience has the best
  • wisdom, and that upon many accounts. First, because he stays for
  • the best things. Second, and also because he will have the glory
  • of his, when the other has nothing but rags.
  • {79} INTER. Nay, you may add another, to wit, the glory of the next
  • world will never wear out; but these are suddenly gone. Therefore
  • Passion had not so much reason to laugh at Patience, because he had
  • his good things first, as Patience will have to laugh at Passion,
  • because he had his best things last; for first must give place to
  • last, because last must have his time to come; but last gives place
  • to nothing; for there is not another to succeed. He, therefore,
  • that hath his portion first, must needs have a time to spend it;
  • but he that hath his portion last, must have it lastingly; therefore
  • it is said of Dives, "Thou in thy life-time receivedst thy good
  • things, and likewise Lazarus evil things; but now he is comforted,
  • and thou art tormented." [Luke 16:25]
  • CHR. Then I perceive it is not best to covet things that are now,
  • but to wait for things to come.
  • INTER. You say the truth: "For the things which are seen are
  • temporal; but the things which are not seen are eternal." [2 Cor.
  • 4:18] But though this be so, yet since things present and our
  • fleshly appetite are such near neighbours one to another; and again,
  • because things to come, and carnal sense, are such strangers one
  • to another; therefore it is, that the first of these so suddenly
  • fall into amity, and that distance is so continued between the
  • second.
  • {80} Then I saw in my dream that the Interpreter took Christian by
  • the hand, and led him into a place where was a fire burning against
  • a wall, and one standing by it, always casting much water upon it,
  • to quench it; yet did the fire burn higher and hotter.
  • Then said Christian, What means this?
  • {81} The Interpreter answered, This fire is the work of grace that
  • is wrought in the heart; he that casts water upon it, to extinguish
  • and put it out, is the Devil; but in that thou seest the fire
  • notwithstanding burn higher and hotter, thou shalt also see the
  • reason of that. So he had him about to the backside of the wall,
  • where he saw a man with a vessel of oil in his hand, of the which
  • he did also continually cast, but secretly, into the fire.
  • Then said Christian, What means this?
  • {82} The Interpreter answered, This is Christ, who continually,
  • with the oil of his grace, maintains the work already begun in the
  • heart: by the means of which, notwithstanding what the devil can
  • do, the souls of his people prove gracious still. [2 Cor. 12:9]
  • And in that thou sawest that the man stood behind the wall to
  • maintain the fire, that is to teach thee that it is hard for the
  • tempted to see how this work of grace is maintained in the soul.
  • I saw also, that the Interpreter took him again by the hand, and
  • led him into a pleasant place, where was builded a stately palace,
  • beautiful to behold; at the sight of which Christian was greatly
  • delighted. He saw also, upon the top thereof, certain persons
  • walking, who were clothed all in gold.
  • Then said Christian, May we go in thither?
  • {83} Then the Interpreter took him, and led him up towards the
  • door of the palace; and behold, at the door stood a great company
  • of men, as desirous to go in; but durst not. There also sat a man
  • at a little distance from the door, at a table-side, with a book
  • and his inkhorn before him, to take the name of him that should
  • enter therein; he saw also, that in the doorway stood many men in
  • armour to keep it, being resolved to do the men that would enter
  • what hurt and mischief they could. Now was Christian somewhat in
  • amaze. At last, when every man started back for fear of the armed
  • men, Christian saw a man of a very stout countenance come up to the
  • man that sat there to write, saying, Set down my name, Sir: the
  • which when he had done, he saw the man draw his sword, and put
  • a helmet upon his head, and rush toward the door upon the armed
  • men, who laid upon him with deadly force; but the man, not at all
  • discouraged, fell to cutting and hacking most fiercely. So after
  • he had received and given many wounds to those that attempted to
  • keep him out, he cut his way through them all [Acts 14:22], and
  • pressed forward into the palace, at which there was a pleasant voice
  • heard from those that were within, even of those that walked upon
  • the top of the palace, saying--
  • "Come in, come in; Eternal glory thou shalt win."
  • So he went in, and was clothed with such garments as they. Then
  • Christian smiled and said; I think verily I know the meaning of
  • this.
  • {84} Now, said Christian, let me go hence. Nay, stay, said the
  • Interpreter, till I have shewed thee a little more, and after that
  • thou shalt go on thy way. So he took him by the hand again, and
  • led him into a very dark room, where there sat a man in an iron
  • cage.
  • Now the man, to look on, seemed very sad; he sat with his eyes looking
  • down to the ground, his hands folded together, and he sighed as if
  • he would break his heart. Then said Christian, What means this?
  • At which the Interpreter bid him talk with the man.
  • Then said Christian to the man, What art thou? The man answered,
  • I am what I was not once.
  • {85} CHR. What wast thou once?
  • MAN. The man said, I was once a fair and flourishing professor,
  • both in mine own eyes, and also in the eyes of others; I once was,
  • as I thought, fair for the Celestial City, and had then even joy
  • at the thoughts that I should get thither. [Luke 8:13]
  • CHR. Well, but what art thou now?
  • MAN. I am now a man of despair, and am shut up in it, as in this
  • iron cage. I cannot get out. Oh, now I cannot!
  • CHR. But how camest thou in this condition?
  • MAN. I left off to watch and be sober. I laid the reins, upon the
  • neck of my lusts; I sinned against the light of the Word and the
  • goodness of God; I have grieved the Spirit, and he is gone; I tempted
  • the devil, and he is come to me; I have provoked God to anger, and
  • he has left me: I have so hardened my heart, that I cannot repent.
  • {86} Then said Christian to the Interpreter, But is there no hope
  • for such a man as this? Ask him, said the Interpreter. Nay, said
  • Christian, pray, Sir, do you.
  • INTER. Then said the Interpreter, Is there no hope, but you must
  • be kept in the iron cage of despair?
  • MAN. No, none at all.
  • INTER. Why, the Son of the Blessed is very pitiful.
  • MAN. I have crucified him to myself afresh [Heb. 6:6]; I have
  • despised his person [Luke 19:14]; I have despised his righteousness;
  • I have "counted his blood an unholy thing"; I have "done despite
  • to the Spirit of grace". [Heb. 10:28-29] Therefore I have shut
  • myself out of all the promises, and there now remains to me nothing
  • but threatenings, dreadful threatenings, fearful threatenings, of
  • certain judgement and fiery indignation, which shall devour me as
  • an adversary.
  • {87} INTER. For what did you bring yourself into this condition?
  • MAN. For the lusts, pleasures, and profits of this world; in the
  • enjoyment of which I did then promise myself much delight; but now
  • every one of those things also bite me, and gnaw me like a burning
  • worm.
  • INTER. But canst thou not now repent and turn?
  • {88} MAN. God hath denied me repentance. His Word gives me no
  • encouragement to believe; yea, himself hath shut me up in this iron
  • cage; nor can all the men in the world let me out. O eternity,
  • eternity! how shall I grapple with the misery that I must meet
  • with in eternity!
  • INTER. Then said the Interpreter to Christian, Let this man's misery
  • be remembered by thee, and be an everlasting caution to thee.
  • CHR. Well, said Christian, this is fearful! God help me to watch
  • and be sober, and to pray that I may shun the cause of this man's
  • misery! Sir, is it not time for me to go on my way now?
  • INTER. Tarry till I shall show thee one thing more, and then thou
  • shalt go on thy way.
  • {89} So he took Christian by the hand again, and led him into
  • a chamber, where there was one rising out of bed; and as he put
  • on his raiment, he shook and trembled. Then said Christian, Why
  • doth this man thus tremble? The Interpreter then bid him tell to
  • Christian the reason of his so doing. So he began and said, This
  • night, as I was in my sleep, I dreamed, and behold the heavens grew
  • exceeding black; also it thundered and lightened in most fearful
  • wise, that it put me into an agony; so I looked up in my dream, and
  • saw the clouds rack at an unusual rate, upon which I heard a great
  • sound of a trumpet, and saw also a man sit upon a cloud, attended
  • with the thousands of heaven; they were all in flaming fire: also
  • the heavens were in a burning flame. I heard then a voice saying,
  • "Arise, ye dead, and come to judgement"; and with that the rocks
  • rent, the graves opened, and the dead that were therein came forth.
  • Some of them were exceeding glad, and looked upward; and some
  • sought to hide themselves under the mountains. [1 Cor. 15:52; 1
  • Thes. 4:16; Jude 14; John 5:28,29; 2 Thes. 1:7,8; Rev. 20:11-14;
  • Isa. 26:21; Micah 7:16,17; Ps. 95:1-3; Dan. 7:10] Then I saw the
  • man that sat upon the cloud open the book, and bid the world draw
  • near. Yet there was, by reason of a fierce flame which issued out
  • and came from before him, a convenient distance betwixt him and
  • them, as betwixt the judge and the prisoners at the bar. [Mal.
  • 3:2,3; Dan. 7:9,10] I heard it also proclaimed to them that attended
  • on the man that sat on the cloud, Gather together the tares, the
  • chaff, and stubble, and cast them into the burning lake. [Matt.
  • 3:12; 13:30; Mal. 4:1] And with that, the bottomless pit opened,
  • just whereabout I stood; out of the mouth of which there came, in
  • an abundant manner, smoke and coals of fire, with hideous noises.
  • It was also said to the same persons, "Gather my wheat into
  • the garner." [Luke 3:17] And with that I saw many catched up and
  • carried away into the clouds, but I was left behind. [1 Thes.
  • 4:16,17] I also sought to hide myself, but I could not, for the man
  • that sat upon the cloud still kept his eye upon me; my sins also
  • came into my mind; and my conscience did accuse me on every side.
  • [Rom. 3:14,15] Upon this I awaked from my sleep.
  • {90} CHR. But what is it that made you so afraid of this sight?
  • MAN. Why, I thought that the day of judgement was come, and that I
  • was not ready for it: but this frighted me most, that the angels
  • gathered up several, and left me behind; also the pit of hell opened
  • her mouth just where I stood. My conscience, too, afflicted me;
  • and, as I thought, the Judge had always his eye upon me, shewing
  • indignation in his countenance.
  • {91} Then said the Interpreter to Christian, Hast thou considered
  • all these things?
  • CHR. Yes, and they put me in hope and fear.
  • INTER. Well, keep all things so in thy mind that they may be as a
  • goad in thy sides, to prick thee forward in the way thou must go.
  • Then Christian began to gird up his loins, and to address himself
  • to his journey. Then said the Interpreter, The Comforter be always
  • with thee, good Christian, to guide thee in the way that leads to
  • the City. So Christian went on his way, saying--
  • "Here I have seen things rare and profitable; Things pleasant,
  • dreadful, things to make me stable In what I have begun to take
  • in hand; Then let me think on them, and understand Wherefore they
  • showed me were, and let me be Thankful, O good Interpreter, to
  • thee."
  • {92} Now I saw in my dream, that the highway up which Christian
  • was to go, was fenced on either side with a wall, and that wall
  • was called Salvation. [Isa. 26:1] Up this way, therefore, did
  • burdened Christian run, but not without great difficulty, because
  • of the load on his back.
  • {93} He ran thus till he came at a place somewhat ascending, and
  • upon that place stood a cross, and a little below, in the bottom,
  • a sepulchre. So I saw in my dream, that just as Christian came up
  • with the cross, his burden loosed from off his shoulders, and fell
  • from off his back, and began to tumble, and so continued to do,
  • till it came to the mouth of the sepulchre, where it fell in, and
  • I saw it no more.
  • {94} Then was Christian glad and lightsome, and said, with a
  • merry heart, "He hath given me rest by his sorrow, and life by his
  • death." Then he stood still awhile to look and wonder; for it was
  • very surprising to him, that the sight of the cross should thus
  • ease him of his burden. He looked therefore, and looked again,
  • even till the springs that were in his head sent the waters down
  • his cheeks. [Zech. 12:10] Now, as he stood looking and weeping,
  • behold three Shining Ones came to him and saluted him with "Peace
  • be unto thee". So the first said to him, "Thy sins be forgiven
  • thee" [Mark 2:5]; the second stripped him of his rags, and clothed
  • him with change of raiment [Zech. 3:4]; the third also set a mark
  • on his forehead, and gave him a roll with a seal upon it, which he
  • bade him look on as he ran, and that he should give it in at the
  • Celestial Gate. [Eph. 1:13] So they went their way.
  • "Who's this? the Pilgrim. How! 'tis very true, Old things are
  • past away, all's become new. Strange! he's another man, upon my
  • word, They be fine feathers that make a fine bird.
  • Then Christian gave three leaps for joy, and went on singing--
  • "Thus far I did come laden with my sin;
  • Nor could aught ease the grief that I was in
  • Till I came hither: What a place is this!
  • Must here be the beginning of my bliss?
  • Must here the burden fall from off my back?
  • Must here the strings that bound it to me crack?
  • Blest cross! blest sepulchre! blest rather be
  • The Man that there was put to shame for me!"
  • {95} I saw then in my dream, that he went on thus, even until he
  • came at a bottom, where he saw, a little out of the way, three men
  • fast asleep, with fetters upon their heels. The name of the one
  • was Simple, another Sloth, and the third Presumption.
  • {96} Christian then seeing them lie in this case went to them, if
  • peradventure he might awake them, and cried, You are like them that
  • sleep on the top of a mast, for the Dead Sea is under you--a gulf
  • that hath no bottom. [Prov. 23:34] Awake, therefore, and come
  • away; be willing also, and I will help you off with your irons. He
  • also told them, If he that "goeth about like a roaring lion" comes
  • by, you will certainly become a prey to his teeth. [1 Pet. 5:8]
  • With that they looked upon him, and began to reply in this sort:
  • Simple said, "I see no danger"; Sloth said, "Yet a little more
  • sleep"; and Presumption said, "Every fat must stand upon its own
  • bottom; what is the answer else that I should give thee?" And so
  • they lay down to sleep again, and Christian went on his way.
  • {97} Yet was he troubled to think that men in that danger should
  • so little esteem the kindness of him that so freely offered to help
  • them, both by awakening of them, counselling of them, and proffering
  • to help them off with their irons. And as he was troubled thereabout,
  • he espied two men come tumbling over the wall on the left hand of
  • the narrow way; and they made up apace to him. The name of the one
  • was Formalist, and the name of the other Hypocrisy. So, as I said,
  • they drew up unto him, who thus entered with them into discourse.
  • {98} CHR. Gentlemen, whence came you, and whither go you?
  • FORM. and HYP. We were born in the land of Vain-glory, and are
  • going for praise to Mount Zion.
  • CHR. Why came you not in at the gate which standeth at the beginning
  • of the way? Know you not that it is written, that he that cometh
  • not in by the door, "but climbeth up some other way, the same is
  • a thief and a robber?" [John 10:1]
  • FORM. and HYP. They said, That to go to the gate for entrance was,
  • by all their countrymen, counted too far about; and that, therefore,
  • their usual way was to make a short cut of it, and to climb over
  • the wall, as they had done.
  • CHR. But will it not be counted a trespass against the Lord of the
  • city whither we are bound, thus to violate his revealed will?
  • {99} FORM. and HYP. They told him, that, as for that, he needed not
  • to trouble his head thereabout; for what they did they had custom
  • for; and could produce, if need were, testimony that would witness
  • it for more than a thousand years.
  • CHR. But, said Christian, will your practice stand a trial at law?
  • FORM. and HYP. They told him, That custom, it being of so long a
  • standing as above a thousand years, would, doubtless, now be admitted
  • as a thing legal by any impartial judge; and besides, said they,
  • if we get into the way, what's matter which way we get in? if we
  • are in, we are in; thou art but in the way, who, as we perceive,
  • came in at the gate; and we are also in the way, that came tumbling
  • over the wall; wherein, now, is thy condition better than ours?
  • CHR. I walk by the rule of my Master; you walk by the rude working
  • of your fancies. You are counted thieves already, by the Lord of
  • the way; therefore, I doubt you will not be found true men at the
  • end of the way. You come in by yourselves, without his direction;
  • and shall go out by yourselves, without his mercy.
  • {100} To this they made him but little answer; only they bid him
  • look to himself. Then I saw that they went on every man in his
  • way without much conference one with another, save that these two
  • men told Christian, that as to laws and ordinances, they doubted
  • not but they should as conscientiously do them as he; therefore,
  • said they, we see not wherein thou differest from us but by the coat
  • that is on thy back, which was, as we trow, given thee by some of
  • thy neighbours, to hide the shame of thy nakedness.
  • {101} CHR. By laws and ordinances you will not be saved, since you
  • came not in by the door. [Gal. 2:16] And as for this coat that
  • is on my back, it was given me by the Lord of the place whither I
  • go; and that, as you say, to cover my nakedness with. And I take
  • it as a token of his kindness to me; for I had nothing but rags
  • before. And besides, thus I comfort myself as I go: Surely, think
  • I, when I come to the gate of the city, the Lord thereof will know
  • me for good since I have this coat on my back--a coat that he
  • gave me freely in the day that he stripped me of my rags. I have,
  • moreover, a mark in my forehead, of which, perhaps, you have taken
  • no notice, which one of my Lord's most intimate associates fixed
  • there in the day that my burden fell off my shoulders. I will tell
  • you, moreover, that I had then given me a roll, sealed, to comfort
  • me by reading as I go on the way; I was also bid to give it in at
  • the Celestial Gate, in token of my certain going in after it; all
  • which things, I doubt, you want, and want them because you came
  • not in at the gate.
  • {102} To these things they gave him no answer; only they looked
  • upon each other, and laughed. Then, I saw that they went on all,
  • save that Christian kept before, who had no more talk but with
  • himself, and that sometimes sighingly, and sometimes comfortably;
  • also he would be often reading in the roll that one of the Shining
  • Ones gave him, by which he was refreshed.
  • {103} I beheld, then, that they all went on till they came to the
  • foot of the Hill Difficulty; at the bottom of which was a spring.
  • There were also in the same place two other ways besides that which
  • came straight from the gate; one turned to the left hand, and the
  • other to the right, at the bottom of the hill; but the narrow way
  • lay right up the hill, and the name of the going up the side of
  • the hill is called Difficulty. Christian now went to the spring,
  • and drank thereof, to refresh himself [Isa. 49:10], and then began
  • to go up the hill, saying--
  • "The hill, though high, I covet to ascend,
  • The difficulty will not me offend;
  • For I perceive the way to life lies here.
  • Come, pluck up heart, let's neither faint nor fear;
  • Better, though difficult, the right way to go,
  • Than wrong, though easy, where the end is woe."
  • {104} The other two also came to the foot of the hill; but when
  • they saw that the hill was steep and high, and that there were two
  • other ways to go, and supposing also that these two ways might meet
  • again, with that up which Christian went, on the other side of the
  • hill, therefore they were resolved to go in those ways. Now the
  • name of one of these ways was Danger, and the name of the other
  • Destruction. So the one took the way which is called Danger,
  • which led him into a great wood, and the other took directly up the
  • way to Destruction, which led him into a wide field, full of dark
  • mountains, where he stumbled and fell, and rose no more.
  • "Shall they who wrong begin yet rightly end? Shall they at all
  • have safety for their friend? No, no; in headstrong manner they
  • set out, And headlong will they fall at last no doubt."
  • {105} I looked, then, after Christian, to see him go up the hill,
  • where I perceived he fell from running to going, and from going to
  • clambering upon his hands and his knees, because of the steepness
  • of the place. Now, about the midway to the top of the hill was a
  • pleasant arbour, made by the Lord of the hill for the refreshing
  • of weary travellers; thither, therefore, Christian got, where also
  • he sat down to rest him. Then he pulled his roll out of his bosom,
  • and read therein to his comfort; he also now began afresh to take
  • a review of the coat or garment that was given him as he stood by
  • the cross. Thus pleasing himself awhile, he at last fell into a
  • slumber, and thence into a fast sleep, which detained him in that
  • place until it was almost night; and in his sleep, his roll fell
  • out of his hand. Now, as he was sleeping, there came one to him,
  • and awaked him, saying, Go to the ant, thou sluggard; consider her
  • ways and be wise. [Prov. 6:6] And with that Christian started
  • up, and sped him on his way, and went apace, till he came to the
  • top of the hill.
  • {106} Now, when he was got up to the top of the hill, there came
  • two men running to meet him amain; the name of the one was Timorous,
  • and of the other, Mistrust; to whom Christian said, Sirs, what's
  • the matter? You run the wrong way. Timorous answered, that they
  • were going to the City of Zion, and had got up that difficult
  • place; but, said he, the further we go, the more danger we meet
  • with; wherefore we turned, and are going back again.
  • Yes, said Mistrust, for just before us lie a couple of lions in
  • the way, whether sleeping or waking we know not, and we could not
  • think, if we came within reach, but they would presently pull us
  • in pieces.
  • {107} CHR. Then said Christian, You make me afraid, but whither
  • shall I fly to be safe? If I go back to mine own country, that
  • is prepared for fire and brimstone, and I shall certainly perish
  • there. If I can get to the Celestial City, I am sure to be in
  • safety there. I must venture. To go back is nothing but death;
  • to go forward is fear of death, and life-everlasting beyond it. I
  • will yet go forward. So Mistrust and Timorous ran down the hill,
  • and Christian went on his way. But, thinking again of what he had
  • heard from the men, he felt in his bosom for his roll, that he
  • might read therein, and be comforted; but he felt, and found it
  • not. Then was Christian in great distress, and knew not what to
  • do; for he wanted that which used to relieve him, and that which
  • should have been his pass into the Celestial City. Here, therefore,
  • he begun to be much perplexed, and knew not what to do. At last
  • he bethought himself that he had slept in the arbour that is on
  • the side of the hill; and, falling down upon his knees, he asked
  • God's forgiveness for that his foolish act, and then went back to
  • look for his roll. But all the way he went back, who can sufficiently
  • set forth the sorrow of Christian's heart? Sometimes he sighed,
  • sometimes he wept, and oftentimes he chid himself for being so
  • foolish to fall asleep in that place, which was erected only for
  • a little refreshment for his weariness. Thus, therefore, he went
  • back, carefully looking on this side and on that, all the way as he
  • went, if happily he might find his roll, that had been his comfort
  • so many times in his journey. He went thus, till he came again
  • within sight of the arbour where he sat and slept; but that sight
  • renewed his sorrow the more, by bringing again, even afresh, his
  • evil of sleeping into his mind. [Rev. 2:5; 1 Thes. 5:7,8] Thus,
  • therefore, he now went on bewailing his sinful sleep, saying, O
  • wretched man that I am that I should sleep in the day-time! that I
  • should sleep in the midst of difficulty! that I should so indulge
  • the flesh, as to use that rest for ease to my flesh, which the
  • Lord of the hill hath erected only for the relief of the spirits
  • of pilgrims!
  • {108} How many steps have I took in vain! Thus it happened
  • to Israel, for their sin; they were sent back again by the way of
  • the Red Sea; and I am made to tread those steps with sorrow, which
  • I might have trod with delight, had it not been for this sinful
  • sleep. How far might I have been on my way by this time! I am
  • made to tread those steps thrice over, which I needed not to have
  • trod but once; yea, now also I am like to be benighted, for the
  • day is almost spent. O, that I had not slept!
  • {109} Now, by this time he was come to the arbour again, where for
  • a while he sat down and wept; but at last, as Christian would have
  • it, looking sorrowfully down under the settle, there he espied his
  • roll; the which he, with trembling and haste, catched up, and put
  • it into his bosom. But who can tell how joyful this man was when
  • he had gotten his roll again! for this roll was the assurance of
  • his life and acceptance at the desired haven. Therefore he laid
  • it up in his bosom, gave thanks to God for directing his eye to the
  • place where it lay, and with joy and tears betook himself again to
  • his journey. But oh, how nimbly now did he go up the rest of the
  • hill! Yet, before he got up, the sun went down upon Christian;
  • and this made him again recall the vanity of his sleeping to his
  • remembrance; and thus he again began to condole with himself: O
  • thou sinful sleep; how, for thy sake, am I like to be benighted in
  • my journey! I must walk without the sun; darkness must cover the
  • path of my feet; and I must hear the noise of the doleful creatures,
  • because of my sinful sleep. [1 Thes. 5:6,7] Now also he remembered
  • the story that Mistrust and Timorous told him of; how they were
  • frighted with the sight of the lions. Then said Christian to
  • himself again, These beasts range in the night for their prey; and
  • if they should meet with me in the dark, how should I shift them?
  • How should I escape being by them torn in pieces? Thus he went on
  • his way. But while he was thus bewailing his unhappy miscarriage,
  • he lift up his eyes, and behold there was a very stately palace
  • before him, the name of which was Beautiful; and it stood just by
  • the highway side.
  • {110} So I saw in my dream that he made haste and went forward,
  • that if possible he might get lodging there. Now, before he had
  • gone far, he entered into a very narrow passage, which was about
  • a furlong off the porter's lodge; and looking very narrowly before
  • him as he went, he espied two lions in the way. Now, thought he,
  • I see the dangers that Mistrust and Timorous were driven back by.
  • (The lions were chained, but he saw not the chains.) Then he was
  • afraid, and thought also himself to go back after them, for he
  • thought nothing but death was before him. But the porter at the
  • lodge, whose name is Watchful, perceiving that Christian made a halt
  • as if he would go back, cried unto him, saying, Is thy strength so
  • small? [Mark 8:34-37] Fear not the lions, for they are chained, and
  • are placed there for trial of faith where it is, and for discovery
  • of those that had none. Keep in the midst of the path, no hurt
  • shall come unto thee.
  • "Difficulty is behind, Fear is before,
  • Though he's got on the hill, the lions roar;
  • A Christian man is never long at ease,
  • When one fright's gone, another doth him seize."
  • {111} Then I saw that he went on, trembling for fear of the lions,
  • but taking good heed to the directions of the porter; he heard
  • them roar, but they did him no harm. Then he clapped his hands,
  • and went on till he came and stood before the gate where the porter
  • was. Then said Christian to the porter, Sir, what house is this?
  • And may I lodge here to-night? The porter answered, This house
  • was built by the Lord of the hill, and he built it for the relief
  • and security of pilgrims. The porter also asked whence he was,
  • and whither he was going.
  • {112} CHR. I am come from the City of Destruction, and am going to
  • Mount Zion; but because the sun is now set, I desire, if I may, to
  • lodge here to-night.
  • POR. What is your name?
  • CHR. My name is now Christian, but my name at the first was Graceless;
  • I came of the race of Japheth, whom God will persuade to dwell in
  • the tents of Shem. [Gen. 9:27]
  • POR. But how doth it happen that you come so late? The sun is set.
  • {113} CHR. I had been here sooner, but that, "wretched man that
  • I am!" I slept in the arbour that stands on the hillside; nay, I
  • had, notwithstanding that, been here much sooner, but that, in my
  • sleep, I lost my evidence, and came without it to the brow of the
  • hill and then feeling for it, and finding it not, I was forced with
  • sorrow of heart, to go back to the place where I slept my sleep,
  • where I found it, and now I am come.
  • POR. Well, I will call out one of the virgins of this place, who
  • will, if she likes your talk, bring you into the rest of the family,
  • according to the rules of the house. So Watchful, the porter, rang
  • a bell, at the sound of which came out at the door of the house,
  • a grave and beautiful damsel, named Discretion, and asked why she
  • was called.
  • {114} The porter answered, This man is in a journey from the City
  • of Destruction to Mount Zion, but being weary and benighted, he
  • asked me if he might lodge here to-night; so I told him I would call
  • for thee, who, after discourse had with him, mayest do as seemeth
  • thee good, even according to the law of the house.
  • {115} Then she asked him whence he was, and whither he was going,
  • and he told her. She asked him also how he got into the way; and
  • he told her. Then she asked him what he had seen and met with
  • in the way; and he told, her. And last she asked his name; so he
  • said, It is Christian, and I have so much the more a desire to lodge
  • here to-night, because, by what I perceive, this place was built
  • by the Lord of the hill for the relief and security of pilgrims.
  • So she smiled, but the water stood in her eyes; and after a
  • little pause, she said, I will call forth two or three more of the
  • family. So she ran to the door, and called out Prudence, Piety,
  • and Charity, who, after a little more discourse with him, had him
  • into the family; and many of them, meeting him at the threshold
  • of the house, said, Come in, thou blessed of the Lord; this house
  • was built by the Lord of the hill, on purpose to entertain such
  • pilgrims in. Then he bowed his head, and followed them into the
  • house. So when he was come in and sat down, they gave him something
  • to drink, and consented together, that until supper was ready, some
  • of them should have some particular discourse with Christian, for
  • the best improvement of time; and they appointed Piety, and Prudence,
  • and Charity to discourse with him; and thus they began:
  • {116} PIETY. Come, good Christian, since we have been so loving
  • to you, to receive you in our house this night, let us, if perhaps
  • we may better ourselves thereby, talk with you of all things that
  • have happened to you in your pilgrimage.
  • CHR. With a very good will, and I am glad that you are so well
  • disposed.
  • {117} PIETY. What moved you at first to betake yourself to a
  • pilgrim's life?
  • CHR. I was driven out of my native country by a dreadful sound that
  • was in mine ears: to wit, that unavoidable destruction did attend
  • me, if I abode in that place where I was.
  • PIETY. But how did it happen that you came out of your country this
  • way?
  • CHR. It was as God would have it; for when I was under the fears
  • of destruction, I did not know whither to go; but by chance there
  • came a man, even to me, as I was trembling and weeping, whose name
  • is Evangelist, and he directed me to the wicket-gate, which else I
  • should never have found, and so set me into the way that hath led
  • me directly to this house.
  • {118} PIETY. But did you not come by the house of the Interpreter?
  • CHR. Yes, and did see such things there, the remembrance of which
  • will stick by me as long as I live; especially three things: to
  • wit, how Christ, in despite of Satan, maintains his work of grace
  • in the heart; how the man had sinned himself quite out of hopes of
  • God's mercy; and also the dream of him that thought in his sleep
  • the day of judgement was come.
  • PIETY. Why, did you hear him tell his dream?
  • CHR. Yes, and a dreadful one it was. I thought it made my heart
  • ache as he was telling of it; but yet I am glad I heard it.
  • {119} PIETY. Was that all that you saw at the house of the Interpreter?
  • CHR. No; he took me and had me where he shewed me a stately palace,
  • and how the people were clad in gold that were in it; and how there
  • came a venturous man and cut his way through the armed men that
  • stood in the door to keep him out, and how he was bid to come in,
  • and win eternal glory. Methought those things did ravish my heart!
  • I would have stayed at that good man's house a twelvemonth, but
  • that I knew I had further to go.
  • {120} PIETY. And what saw you else in the way?
  • CHR. Saw! why, I went but a little further, and I saw one, as
  • I thought in my mind, hang bleeding upon the tree; and the very
  • sight of him made my burden fall off my back, (for I groaned under
  • a very heavy burden,) but then it fell down from off me. It was
  • a strange thing to me, for I never saw such a thing before; yea,
  • and while I stood looking up, for then I could not forbear looking,
  • three Shining Ones came to me. One of them testified that my sins
  • were forgiven me; another stripped me of my rags, and gave me this
  • broidered coat which you see; and the third set the mark which you
  • see in my forehead, and gave me this sealed roll. (And with that
  • he plucked it out of his bosom.)
  • {121} PIETY. But you saw more than this, did you not?
  • CHR. The things that I have told you were the best; yet some other
  • matters I saw, as, namely--I saw three men, Simple, Sloth, and
  • Presumption, lie asleep a little out of the way, as I came, with
  • irons upon their heels; but do you think I could awake them? I
  • also saw Formality and Hypocrisy come tumbling over the wall, to
  • go, as they pretended, to Zion, but they were quickly lost, even
  • as I myself did tell them; but they would not believe. But above
  • all, I found it hard work to get up this hill, and as hard to come
  • by the lions' mouths, and truly if it had not been for the good
  • man, the porter that stands at the gate, I do not know but that
  • after all I might have gone back again; but now I thank God I am
  • here, and I thank you for receiving of me.
  • {122} Then Prudence thought good to ask him a few questions, and
  • desired his answer to them.
  • PRUD. Do you not think sometimes of the country from whence you
  • came?
  • Christian's thoughts of his native country
  • CHR. Yes, but with much shame and detestation: "Truly, if I had
  • been mindful of that country from whence I came out, I might have
  • had opportunity to have returned; but now I desire a better country,
  • that is, an heavenly." [Heb. 11:15,16]
  • PRUD. Do you not yet bear away with you some of the things that
  • then you were conversant withal?
  • CHR. Yes, but greatly against my will; especially my inward and
  • carnal cogitations, with which all my countrymen, as well as myself,
  • were delighted; but now all those things are my grief; and might
  • I but choose mine own things,
  • Christian's choice
  • I would choose never to think of those things more; but when I
  • would be doing of that which is best, that which is worst is with
  • me. [Rom 7:16-19]
  • {123} PRUD. Do you not find sometimes, as if those things were
  • vanquished, which at other times are your perplexity?
  • Christian's golden hours
  • CHR. Yes, but that is seldom; but they are to me golden hours in
  • which such things happen to me.
  • PRUD. Can you remember by what means you find your annoyances, at
  • times, as if they were vanquished?
  • CHR. Yes, when I think what I saw at the cross, that will do it;
  • and when I look upon my broidered coat, that will do it; also when
  • I look into the roll that I carry in my bosom, that will do it;
  • and when my thoughts wax warm about whither I am going, that will
  • do it.
  • {124} PRUD. And what is it that makes you so desirous to go to
  • Mount Zion?
  • CHR. Why, there I hope to see him alive that did hang dead on the
  • cross; and there I hope to be rid of all those things that to this
  • day are in me an annoyance to me; there, they say, there is no
  • death; and there I shall dwell with such company as I like best.
  • [Isa. 25:8; Rev. 21:4] For, to tell you truth, I love him,
  • because I was by him eased of my burden; and I am weary of my inward
  • sickness. I would fain be where I shall die no more, and with the
  • company that shall continually cry, "Holy, Holy, Holy!"
  • {125} Then said Charity to Christian, Have you a family? Are you
  • a married man?
  • CHR. I have a wife and four small children.
  • CHAR. And why did you not bring them along with you?
  • Christian's love to his wife and children
  • CHR. Then Christian wept, and said, Oh, how willingly would I have
  • done it! but they were all of them utterly averse to my going on
  • pilgrimage.
  • CHAR. But you should have talked to them, and have endeavoured to
  • have shown them the danger of being behind.
  • CHR. So I did; and told them also of what God had shown to me
  • of the destruction of our city; "but I seemed to them as one that
  • mocked", and they believed me not. [Gen. 19:14]
  • CHAR. And did you pray to God that he would bless your counsel to
  • them?
  • CHR. Yes, and that with much affection: for you must think that
  • my wife and poor children were very dear unto me.
  • CHAR. But did you tell them of your own sorrow, and fear of
  • destruction? for I suppose that destruction was visible enough to
  • you.
  • Christian's fears of perishing might be read in his very countenance
  • CHR. Yes, over, and over, and over. They might also see my fears
  • in my countenance, in my tears, and also in my trembling under the
  • apprehension of the judgement that did hang over our heads; but
  • all was not sufficient to prevail with them to come with me.
  • CHAR. But what could they say for themselves, why they came not?
  • {126} CHR. Why, my wife was afraid of losing this world, and
  • my children were given to the foolish delights of youth: so what
  • by one thing, and what by another, they left me to wander in this
  • manner alone.
  • CHAR. But did you not, with your vain life, damp all that you by
  • words used by way of persuasion to bring them away with you?
  • {127} Christian's good conversation before his wife and children
  • CHR. Indeed, I cannot commend my life; for I am conscious to myself
  • of many failings therein; I know also that a man by his conversation
  • may soon overthrow what by argument or persuasion he doth labour to
  • fasten upon others for their good. Yet this I can say, I was very
  • wary of giving them occasion, by any unseemly action, to make them
  • averse to going on pilgrimage. Yea, for this very thing they would
  • tell me I was too precise, and that I denied myself of things,
  • for their sakes, in which they saw no evil. Nay, I think I may
  • say, that if what they saw in me did hinder them, it was my great
  • tenderness in sinning against God, or of doing any wrong to my
  • neighbour.
  • CHAR. Indeed Cain hated his brother, "because his own works were
  • evil, and his brother's righteous" [1 John 3:12]; and if thy wife
  • and children have been offended with thee for this, they thereby
  • show themselves to be implacable to good, and "thou hast delivered
  • thy soul from their blood". [Ezek. 3:19]
  • {128} Now I saw in my dream, that thus they sat talking together
  • until supper was ready. So when they had made ready, they sat down
  • to meat. Now the table was furnished "with fat things, and with
  • wine that was well refined": and all their talk at the table was
  • about the Lord of the hill; as, namely, about what he had done, and
  • wherefore he did what he did, and why he had builded that house.
  • And by what they said, I perceived that he had been a great warrior,
  • and had fought with and slain "him that had the Power of death",
  • but not without great danger to himself, which made me love him
  • the more. [Heb. 2:14,15]
  • {129} For, as they said, and as I believe (said Christian), he did
  • it with the loss of much blood; but that which put glory of grace
  • into all he did, was, that he did it out of pure love to his country.
  • And besides, there were some of them of the household that said
  • they had been and spoke with him since he did die on the cross; and
  • they have attested that they had it from his own lips, that he is
  • such a lover of poor pilgrims, that the like is not to be found
  • from the east to the west.
  • {130} They, moreover, gave an instance of what they affirmed, and
  • that was, he had stripped himself of his glory, that he might do
  • this for the poor; and that they heard him say and affirm, "that
  • he would not dwell in the mountain of Zion alone." They said,
  • moreover, that he had made many pilgrims princes, though by nature
  • they were beggars born, and their original had been the dunghill.
  • [1 Sam 2:8; Ps. 113:7]
  • {131} Christian's bedchamber
  • Thus they discoursed together till late at night; and after they had
  • committed themselves to their Lord for protection, they betook
  • themselves to rest: the Pilgrim they laid in a large upper
  • chamber, whose window opened towards the sun-rising: the name of
  • the chamber was Peace; where he slept till break of day, and then
  • he awoke and sang--
  • "Where am I now? Is this the love and care
  • Of Jesus for the men that pilgrims are?
  • Thus to provide! that I should be forgiven!
  • And dwell already the next door to heaven!"
  • {132} So in the morning they all got up; and, after some more
  • discourse, they told him that he should not depart till they had
  • shown him the rarities of that place. And first they had him into
  • the study, where they showed him records of the greatest antiquity;
  • in which, as I remember my dream, they showed him first the pedigree of
  • the Lord of the hill, that he was the son of the Ancient of Days,
  • and came by that eternal generation. Here also was more fully
  • recorded the acts that he had done, and the names of many hundreds
  • that he had taken into his service; and how he had placed them in
  • such habitations that could neither by length of days, nor decays
  • of nature, be dissolved.
  • {133} Then they read to him some of the worthy acts that some of
  • his servants had done: as, how they had "subdued kingdoms, wrought
  • righteousness, obtained promises, stopped the mouths of lions,
  • quenched the violence of fire, escaped the edge of the sword, out
  • of weakness were made strong, waxed valiant in fight, and turned
  • to flight the armies of the aliens." [Heb 11:33,34]
  • {134} They then read again, in another part of the records of the
  • house, where it was shewed how willing their Lord was to receive
  • into his favour any, even any, though they in time past had offered
  • great affronts to his person and proceedings. Here also were
  • several other histories of many other famous things, of all which
  • Christian had a view; as of things both ancient and modern; together
  • with prophecies and predictions of things that have their certain
  • accomplishment, both to the dread and amazement of enemies, and
  • the comfort and solace of pilgrims.
  • {135} The next day they took him and had him into the armoury,
  • where they showed him all manner of furniture, which their Lord
  • had provided for pilgrims, as sword, shield, helmet, breastplate,
  • ALL-PRAYER, and shoes that would not wear out. And there was here
  • enough of this to harness out as many men for the service of their
  • Lord as there be stars in the heaven for multitude.
  • {136} They also showed him some of the engines with which some of
  • his servants had done wonderful things. They shewed him Moses'
  • rod; the hammer and nail with which Jael slew Sisera; the pitchers,
  • trumpets, and lamps too, with which Gideon put to flight the armies
  • of Midian. Then they showed him the ox's goad wherewith Shamgar
  • slew six hundred men. They showed him also the jaw-bone with which
  • Samson did such mighty feats. They showed him, moreover, the sling
  • and stone with which David slew Goliath of Gath; and the sword,
  • also, with which their Lord will kill the Man of Sin, in the day
  • that he shall rise up to the prey. They showed him, besides, many
  • excellent things, with which Christian was much delighted. This
  • done, they went to their rest again.
  • {137} Then I saw in my dream, that on the morrow he got up to go
  • forward; but they desired him to stay till the next day also; and
  • then, said they, we will, if the day be clear, show you the Delectable
  • Mountains, which, they said, would yet further add to his comfort,
  • because they were nearer the desired haven than the place where at
  • present he was; so he consented and stayed. When the morning was
  • up, they had him to the top of the house, and bid him look south;
  • so he did: and behold, at a great distance, he saw a most pleasant
  • mountainous country, beautified with woods, vineyards, fruits of
  • all sorts, flowers also, with springs and fountains, very delectable
  • to behold. [Isa. 33:16,17] Then he asked the name of the country.
  • They said it was Immanuel's Land; and it is as common, said they,
  • as this hill is, to and for all the pilgrims. And when thou comest
  • there from thence, said they, thou mayest see to the gate of the
  • Celestial City, as the shepherds that live there will make appear.
  • {138} Now he bethought himself of setting forward, and they were
  • willing he should. But first, said they, let us go again into the
  • armoury. So they did; and when they came there, they harnessed him
  • from head to foot with what was of proof, lest, perhaps, he should
  • meet with assaults in the way. He being, therefore, thus accoutred,
  • walketh out with his friends to the gate, and there he asked the
  • porter if he saw any pilgrims pass by. Then the porter answered,
  • Yes.
  • {139} CHR. Pray, did you know him? said he.
  • POR. I asked him his name, and he told me it was Faithful.
  • CHR. Oh, said Christian, I know him; he is my townsman, my near
  • neighbour; he comes from the place where I was born. How far do
  • you think he may be before?
  • POR. He is got by this time below the hill.
  • CHR. Well, said Christian, good Porter, the Lord be with thee, and
  • add to all thy blessings much increase, for the kindness that thou
  • hast showed to me.
  • {140} Then he began to go forward; but Discretion, Piety, Charity,
  • and Prudence would accompany him down to the foot of the hill. So
  • they went on together, reiterating their former discourses, till
  • they came to go down the hill. Then said Christian, As it was
  • difficult coming up, so, so far as I can see, it is dangerous going
  • down. Yes, said Prudence, so it is, for it is a hard matter for
  • a man to go down into the Valley of Humiliation, as thou art now,
  • and to catch no slip by the way; therefore, said they, are we come
  • out to accompany thee down the hill. So he began to go down, but
  • very warily; yet he caught a slip or two.
  • {141} Then I saw in my dream that these good companions, when
  • Christian was gone to the bottom of the hill, gave him a loaf of
  • bread, a bottle of wine, and a cluster of raisins; and then he went
  • on his way.
  • But now, in this Valley of Humiliation, poor Christian was hard put
  • to it; for he had gone but a little way, before he espied a foul
  • fiend coming over the field to meet him; his name is Apollyon. Then
  • did Christian begin to be afraid, and to cast in his mind whether
  • to go back or to stand his ground. But he considered again that
  • he had no armour for his back; and therefore thought that to turn
  • the back to him might give him the greater advantage with ease to
  • pierce him with his darts.
  • Christian's resolution at the approach of Apollyon
  • Therefore he resolved to venture and stand his ground; for, thought
  • he, had I no more in mine eye than the saving of my life, it would
  • be the best way to stand.
  • {142} So he went on, and Apollyon met him. Now the monster was
  • hideous to behold; he was clothed with scales, like a fish, (and
  • they are his pride,) he had wings like a dragon, feet like a bear,
  • and out of his belly came fire and smoke, and his mouth was as the
  • mouth of a lion. When he was come up to Christian, he beheld him
  • with a disdainful countenance, and thus began to question with him.
  • {143} APOL. Whence come you? and whither are you bound?
  • CHR. I am come from the City of Destruction, which is the place of
  • all evil, and am going to the City of Zion.
  • APOL. By this I perceive thou art one of my subjects, for all that
  • country is mine, and I am the prince and god of it. How is it,
  • then, that thou hast run away from thy king? Were it not that I
  • hope thou mayest do me more service, I would strike thee now, at
  • one blow, to the ground.
  • {144} CHR. I was born, indeed, in your dominions, but your service
  • was hard, and your wages such as a man could not live on, "for the
  • wages of sin is death" [Rom 6:23]; therefore, when I was come to
  • years, I did, as other considerate persons do, look out, if, perhaps,
  • I might mend myself.
  • Apollyon's flattery
  • APOL. There is no prince that will thus lightly lose his subjects,
  • neither will I as yet lose thee; but since thou complainest of thy
  • service and wages, be content to go back: what our country will
  • afford, I do here promise to give thee.
  • CHR. But I have let myself to another, even to the King of princes;
  • and how can I, with fairness, go back with thee?
  • {145} APOL. Thou hast done in this, according to the proverb,
  • "Changed a bad for a worse"; but it is ordinary for those that
  • have professed themselves his servants, after a while to give him
  • the slip, and return again to me. Do thou so too, and all shall
  • be well.
  • CHR. I have given him my faith, and sworn my allegiance to him;
  • how, then, can I go back from this, and not be hanged as a traitor?
  • APOL. Thou didst the same to me, and yet I am willing to pass by
  • all, if now thou wilt yet turn again and go back.
  • {146} CHR. What I promised thee was in my nonage; and, besides, I
  • count the Prince under whose banner now I stand is able to absolve
  • me; yea, and to pardon also what I did as to my compliance with
  • thee; and besides, O thou destroying Apollyon! to speak truth,
  • I like his service, his wages, his servants, his government, his
  • company, and country, better than thine; and, therefore, leave off
  • to persuade me further; I am his servant, and I will follow him.
  • {147} APOL. Consider, again, when thou art in cool blood, what thou
  • art like to meet with in the way that thou goest. Thou knowest
  • that, for the most part, his servants come to an ill end, because
  • they are transgressors against me and my ways. How many of them
  • have been put to shameful deaths! and, besides, thou countest his
  • service better than mine, whereas he never came yet from the place
  • where he is to deliver any that served him out of their hands; but
  • as for me, how many times, as all the world very well knows, have
  • I delivered, either by power, or fraud, those that have faithfully
  • served me, from him and his, though taken by them; and so I will
  • deliver thee.
  • CHR. His forbearing at present to deliver them is on purpose to try
  • their love, whether they will cleave to him to the end; and as for
  • the ill end thou sayest they come to, that is most glorious in their
  • account; for, for present deliverance, they do not much expect it,
  • for they stay for their glory, and then they shall have it when
  • their Prince comes in his and the glory of the angels.
  • APOL. Thou hast already been unfaithful in thy service to him; and
  • how dost thou think to receive wages of him?
  • CHR. Wherein, O Apollyon! have I been unfaithful to him?
  • {148} APOL. Thou didst faint at first setting out, when thou wast
  • almost choked in the Gulf of Despond; thou didst attempt wrong ways
  • to be rid of thy burden, whereas thou shouldst have stayed till
  • thy Prince had taken it off; thou didst sinfully sleep and lose
  • thy choice thing; thou wast, also, almost persuaded to go back at
  • the sight of the lions; and when thou talkest of thy journey, and
  • of what thou hast heard and seen, thou art inwardly desirous of
  • vain-glory in all that thou sayest or doest.
  • CHR. All this is true, and much more which thou hast left out;
  • but the Prince whom I serve and honour is merciful, and ready to
  • forgive; but, besides, these infirmities possessed me in thy country,
  • for there I sucked them in; and I have groaned under them, been
  • sorry for them, and have obtained pardon of my Prince.
  • {149} APOL. Then Apollyon broke out into a grievous rage, saying,
  • I am an enemy to this Prince; I hate his person, his laws, and
  • people; I am come out on purpose to withstand thee.
  • CHR. Apollyon, beware what you do; for I am in the King's highway,
  • the way of holiness; therefore take heed to yourself.
  • APOL. Then Apollyon straddled quite over the whole breadth of the
  • way, and said, I am void of fear in this matter: prepare thyself
  • to die; for I swear by my infernal den, that thou shalt go no
  • further; here will I spill thy soul.
  • {150} And with that he threw a flaming dart at his breast; but
  • Christian had a shield in his hand, with which he caught it, and
  • so prevented the danger of that.
  • Then did Christian draw, for he saw it was time to bestir him; and
  • Apollyon as fast made at him, throwing darts as thick as hail; by
  • the which, notwithstanding all that Christian could do to avoid it,
  • Apollyon wounded him in his head, his hand, and foot. This made
  • Christian give a little back; Apollyon, therefore, followed his work
  • amain, and Christian again took courage, and resisted as manfully
  • as he could. This sore combat lasted for above half a day, even
  • till Christian was almost quite spent; for you must know that
  • Christian, by reason of his wounds, must needs grow weaker and
  • weaker.
  • {151} Then Apollyon, espying his opportunity, began to gather up
  • close to Christian, and wrestling with him, gave him a dreadful
  • fall; and with that Christian's sword flew out of his hand. Then
  • said Apollyon, I am sure of thee now. And with that he had almost
  • pressed him to death, so that Christian began to despair of life;
  • but as God would have it, while Apollyon was fetching of his
  • last blow, thereby to make a full end of this good man, Christian
  • nimbly stretched out his hand for his sword, and caught it, saying,
  • "Rejoice not against me, O mine enemy; when I fall I shall arise"
  • [Micah 7:8];
  • Christian's victory over Apollyon
  • and with that gave him a deadly thrust, which made him give back,
  • as one that had received his mortal wound. Christian perceiving
  • that, made at him again, saying, "Nay, in all these things we are
  • more than conquerors through him that loved us". [Rom. 8:37] And
  • with that Apollyon spread forth his dragon's wings, and sped him
  • away, that Christian for a season saw him no more. [James 4:7]
  • {152} In this combat no man can imagine, unless he had seen and
  • heard as I did, what yelling and hideous roaring Apollyon made all
  • the time of the fight--he spake like a dragon; and, on the other
  • side, what sighs and groans burst from Christian's heart. I never
  • saw him all the while give so much as one pleasant look, till he
  • perceived he had wounded Apollyon with his two-edged sword; then,
  • indeed, he did smile, and look upward; but it was the dreadfullest
  • sight that ever I saw.
  • A more unequal match can hardly be,--CHRISTIAN must fight an
  • Angel; but you see,
  • The valiant man by handling Sword and Shield,
  • Doth make him, tho' a Dragon, quit the field.
  • {153} So when the battle was over, Christian said, "I will here
  • give thanks to him that delivered me out of the mouth of the lion,
  • to him that did help me against Apollyon." And so he did, saying--
  • Great Beelzebub, the captain of this fiend,
  • Design'd my ruin; therefore to this end
  • He sent him harness'd out: and he with rage
  • That hellish was, did fiercely me engage.
  • But blessed Michael helped me, and I,
  • By dint of sword, did quickly make him fly.
  • Therefore to him let me give lasting praise,
  • And thank and bless his holy name always.
  • {154} Then there came to him a hand, with some of the leaves of the
  • tree of life, the which Christian took, and applied to the wounds
  • that he had received in the battle, and was healed immediately.
  • He also sat down in that place to eat bread, and to drink of the
  • bottle that was given him a little before; so, being refreshed,
  • he addressed himself to his journey, with his sword drawn in his
  • hand; for he said, I know not but some other enemy may be at hand.
  • But he met with no other affront from Apollyon quite through this
  • valley.
  • {155} Now, at the end of this valley was another, called the Valley
  • of the Shadow of Death, and Christian must needs go through it,
  • because the way to the Celestial City lay through the midst of it.
  • Now, this valley is a very solitary place. The prophet Jeremiah
  • thus describes it: "A wilderness, a land of deserts and of pits,
  • a land of drought, and of the shadow of death, a land that no man"
  • (but a Christian) "passed through, and where no man dwelt." [Jer.
  • 2:6]
  • Now here Christian was worse put to it than in his fight with
  • Apollyon, as by the sequel you shall see.
  • {156} I saw then in my dream, that when Christian was got to the
  • borders of the Shadow of Death, there met him two men, children of
  • them that brought up an evil report of the good land [Num. 13],
  • making haste to go back; to whom Christian spake as follows:--
  • {157} CHR. Whither are you going?
  • MEN. They said, Back! back! and we would have you to do so too,
  • if either life or peace is prized by you.
  • CHR. Why, what's the matter? said Christian.
  • MEN. Matter! said they; we were going that way as you are going,
  • and went as far as we durst; and indeed we were almost past coming
  • back; for had we gone a little further, we had not been here to
  • bring the news to thee.
  • CHR. But what have you met with? said Christian.
  • MEN. Why, we were almost in the Valley of the Shadow of Death; but
  • that, by good hap, we looked before us, and saw the danger before
  • we came to it. [Ps. 44:19; 107:10]
  • CHR. But what have you seen? said Christian.
  • {158} MEN. Seen! Why, the Valley itself, which is as dark as pitch;
  • we also saw there the hobgoblins, satyrs, and dragons of the pit;
  • we heard also in that Valley a continual howling and yelling, as of
  • a people under unutterable misery, who there sat bound in affliction
  • and irons; and over that Valley hangs the discouraging clouds of
  • confusion. Death also doth always spread his wings over it. In
  • a word, it is every whit dreadful, being utterly without order.
  • [Job 3:5; 10:22]
  • CHR. Then, said Christian, I perceive not yet, by what you have
  • said, but that this is my way to the desired haven. [Jer. 2:6]
  • MEN. Be it thy way; we will not choose it for ours. So, they parted,
  • and Christian went on his way, but still with his sword drawn in
  • his hand, for fear lest he should be assaulted.
  • {159} I saw then in my dream, so far as this valley reached, there
  • was on the right hand a very deep ditch; that ditch is it into
  • which the blind have led the blind in all ages, and have both there
  • miserably perished. [Ps. 69:14,15] Again, behold, on the left
  • hand, there was a very dangerous quag, into which, if even a good
  • man falls, he can find no bottom for his foot to stand on. Into
  • that quag King David once did fall, and had no doubt therein been
  • smothered, had not HE that is able plucked him out.
  • {160} The pathway was here also exceeding narrow, and therefore
  • good Christian was the more put to it; for when he sought, in the
  • dark, to shun the ditch on the one hand, he was ready to tip over
  • into the mire on the other; also when he sought to escape the mire,
  • without great carefulness he would be ready to fall into the ditch.
  • Thus he went on, and I heard him here sigh bitterly; for, besides
  • the dangers mentioned above, the pathway was here so dark, and
  • ofttimes, when he lift up his foot to set forward, he knew not
  • where or upon what he should set it next.
  • Poor man! where art thou now? thy day is night.
  • Good man, be not cast down, thou yet art right,
  • Thy way to heaven lies by the gates of Hell;
  • Cheer up, hold out, with thee it shall go well.
  • {161} About the midst of this valley, I perceived the mouth of
  • hell to be, and it stood also hard by the wayside. Now, thought
  • Christian, what shall I do? And ever and anon the flame and smoke
  • would come out in such abundance, with sparks and hideous noises,
  • (things that cared not for Christian's sword, as did Apollyon
  • before), that he was forced to put up his sword, and betake himself
  • to another weapon called All-prayer. [Eph. 6:18] So he cried in my
  • hearing, "O Lord, I beseech thee, deliver my soul!" [Ps. 116:4]
  • Thus he went on a great while, yet still the flames would be
  • reaching towards him. Also he heard doleful voices, and rushings
  • to and fro, so that sometimes he thought he should be torn in
  • pieces, or trodden down like mire in the streets. This frightful
  • sight was seen, and these dreadful noises were heard by him for
  • several miles together; and, coming to a place where he thought he
  • heard a company of fiends coming forward to meet him, he stopped,
  • and began to muse what he had best to do. Sometimes he had half
  • a thought to go back; then again he thought he might be half way
  • through the valley; he remembered also how he had already vanquished
  • many a danger, and that the danger of going back might be much more
  • than for to go forward; so he resolved to go on. Yet the fiends
  • seemed to come nearer and nearer; but when they were come even
  • almost at him, he cried out with a most vehement voice, "I will walk
  • in the strength of the Lord God!" so they gave back, and came no
  • further.
  • {162} One thing I would not let slip. I took notice that now poor
  • Christian was so confounded, that he did not know his own voice;
  • and thus I perceived it. Just when he was come over against the
  • mouth of the burning pit, one of the wicked ones got behind him, and
  • stepped up softly to him, and whisperingly suggested many grievous
  • blasphemies to him, which he verily thought had proceeded from his
  • own mind. This put Christian more to it than anything that he met
  • with before, even to think that he should now blaspheme him that
  • he loved so much before; yet, if he could have helped it, he would
  • not have done it; but he had not the discretion either to stop his
  • ears, or to know from whence these blasphemies came.
  • {163} When Christian had travelled in this disconsolate condition
  • some considerable time, he thought he heard the voice of a man,
  • as going before him, saying, "Though I walk through the valley of
  • the shadow of death, I will fear no evil, for thou art with me."
  • [Ps. 23:4]
  • {164} Then he was glad, and that for these reasons:
  • First, Because he gathered from thence, that some who feared God
  • were in this valley as well as himself.
  • Secondly, For that he perceived God was with them, though in that
  • dark and dismal state; and why not, thought he, with me? though,
  • by reason of the impediment that attends this place, I cannot
  • perceive it. [Job 9:11]
  • Thirdly, For that he hoped, could he overtake them, to have company
  • by and by. So he went on, and called to him that was before; but
  • he knew not what to answer; for that he also thought to be alone.
  • And by and by the day broke; then said Christian, He hath turned
  • "the shadow of death into the morning". [Amos 5:8]
  • {165} Now morning being come, he looked back, not out of desire to
  • return, but to see, by the light of the day, what hazards he had
  • gone through in the dark. So he saw more perfectly the ditch that
  • was on the one hand, and the mire that was on the other; also how
  • narrow the way was which led betwixt them both; also now he saw the
  • hobgoblins, and satyrs, and dragons of the pit, but all afar off,
  • (for after break of day, they came not nigh;) yet they were discovered
  • to him, according to that which is written, "He discovereth deep
  • things out of darkness, and bringeth out to light the shadow of
  • death." [Job 12:22]
  • {166} Now was Christian much affected with his deliverance from all
  • the dangers of his solitary way; which dangers, though he feared
  • them more before, yet he saw them more clearly now, because the light
  • of the day made them conspicuous to him. And about this time the
  • sun was rising, and this was another mercy to Christian; for you
  • must note, that though the first part of the Valley of the Shadow
  • of Death was dangerous, yet this second part which he was yet to
  • go, was, if possible, far more dangerous; for from the place where
  • he now stood, even to the end of the valley, the way was all along
  • set so full of snares, traps, gins, and nets here, and so full of
  • pits, pitfalls, deep holes, and shelvings down there, that, had it
  • now been dark, as it was when he came the first part of the way,
  • had he had a thousand souls, they had in reason been cast away; but,
  • as I said just now, the sun was rising. Then said he, "His candle
  • shineth upon my head, and by his light I walk through darkness."
  • [Job 29:3]
  • {167} In this light, therefore, he came to the end of the valley.
  • Now I saw in my dream, that at the end of this valley lay blood,
  • bones, ashes, and mangled bodies of men, even of pilgrims that had
  • gone this way formerly; and while I was musing what should be the
  • reason, I espied a little before me a cave, where two giants, POPE
  • and PAGAN, dwelt in old time; by whose power and tyranny the men
  • whose bones, blood, and ashes, &c., lay there, were cruelly put
  • to death. But by this place Christian went without much danger,
  • whereat I somewhat wondered; but I have learnt since, that PAGAN
  • has been dead many a day; and as for the other, though he be yet
  • alive, he is, by reason of age, and also of the many shrewd brushes
  • that he met with in his younger days, grown so crazy and stiff in
  • his joints, that he can now do little more than sit in his cave's
  • mouth, grinning at pilgrims as they go by, and biting his nails
  • because he cannot come at them.
  • {168} So I saw that Christian went on his way; yet, at the sight of
  • the Old Man that sat in the mouth of the cave, he could not tell
  • what to think, especially because he spake to him, though he could
  • not go after him, saying, "You will never mend till more of you be
  • burned." But he held his peace, and set a good face on it, and so
  • went by and catched no hurt. Then sang Christian:
  • O world of wonders! (I can say no less),
  • That I should be preserved in that distress
  • That I have met with here! O blessed be
  • That hand that from it hath deliver'd me!
  • Dangers in darkness, devils, hell, and sin
  • Did compass me, while I this vale was in:
  • Yea, snares, and pits, and traps, and nets, did lie
  • My path about, that worthless, silly I
  • Might have been catch'd, entangled, and cast down;
  • But since I live, let JESUS wear the crown.
  • {169} Now, as Christian went on his way, he came to a little ascent,
  • which was cast up on purpose that pilgrims might see before them.
  • Up there, therefore, Christian went, and looking forward, he saw
  • Faithful before him, upon his journey. Then said Christian aloud,
  • "Ho! ho! So-ho! stay, and I will be your companion!" At that,
  • Faithful looked behind him; to whom Christian cried again, "Stay,
  • stay, till I come up to you!" But Faithful answered, "No, I am
  • upon my life, and the avenger of blood is behind me."
  • {170} At this, Christian was somewhat moved, and putting to all
  • his strength, he quickly got up with Faithful, and did also overrun
  • him; so the last was first. Then did Christian vain-gloriously
  • smile, because he had gotten the start of his brother; but not
  • taking good heed to his feet, he suddenly stumbled and fell, and
  • could not rise again until Faithful came up to help him.
  • Christian's fall makes Faithful and he go lovingly together
  • Then I saw in my dream they went very lovingly on together, and had
  • sweet discourse of all things that had happened to them in their
  • pilgrimage; and thus Christian began:
  • {171} CHR. My honoured and well-beloved brother, Faithful, I am
  • glad that I have overtaken you; and that God has so tempered our
  • spirits, that we can walk as companions in this so pleasant a path.
  • FAITH. I had thought, dear friend, to have had your company quite
  • from our town; but you did get the start of me, wherefore I was
  • forced to come thus much of the way alone.
  • CHR. How long did you stay in the City of Destruction before you
  • set out after me on your pilgrimage?
  • FAITH. Till I could stay no longer; for there was great talk presently
  • after you were gone out that our city would, in short time, with
  • fire from heaven, be burned down to the ground.
  • CHR. What! did your neighbours talk so?
  • FAITH. Yes, it was for a while in everybody's mouth.
  • CHR. What! and did no more of them but you come out to escape the
  • danger?
  • FAITH. Though there was, as I said, a great talk thereabout, yet
  • I do not think they did firmly believe it. For in the heat of the
  • discourse, I heard some of them deridingly speak of you and of your
  • desperate journey, (for so they called this your pilgrimage), but
  • I did believe, and do still, that the end of our city will be with
  • fire and brimstone from above; and therefore I have made my
  • escape.
  • {172} CHR. Did you hear no talk of neighbour Pliable?
  • FAITH. Yes, Christian, I heard that he followed you till he came
  • at the Slough of Despond, where, as some said, he fell in; but he
  • would not be known to have so done; but I am sure he was soundly
  • bedabbled with that kind of dirt.
  • CHR. And what said the neighbours to him?
  • FAITH. He hath, since his going back, been had greatly in derision,
  • and that among all sorts of people; some do mock and despise him;
  • and scarce will any set him on work. He is now seven times worse
  • than if he had never gone out of the city.
  • CHR. But why should they be so set against him, since they also
  • despise the way that he forsook?
  • FAITH. Oh, they say, hang him, he is a turncoat! he was not true
  • to his profession. I think God has stirred up even his enemies to
  • hiss at him, and make him a proverb, because he hath forsaken the
  • way. [Jer. 29:18,19]
  • CHR. Had you no talk with him before you came out?
  • FAITH. I met him once in the streets, but he leered away on the
  • other side, as one ashamed of what he had done; so I spake not to
  • him.
  • {173} CHR. Well, at my first setting out, I had hopes of that man;
  • but now I fear he will perish in the overthrow of the city; for
  • it is happened to him according to the true proverb, "The dog is
  • turned to his own vomit again; and the sow that was washed, to her
  • wallowing in the mire." [2 Pet. 2:22]
  • FAITH. These are my fears of him too; but who can hinder that which
  • will be?
  • CHR. Well, neighbour Faithful, said Christian, let us leave him,
  • and talk of things that more immediately concern ourselves. Tell
  • me now, what you have met with in the way as you came; for I know
  • you have met with some things, or else it may be writ for a wonder.
  • {174} FAITH. I escaped the Slough that I perceived you fell into,
  • and got up to the gate without that danger; only I met with one
  • whose name was Wanton, who had like to have done me a mischief.
  • CHR. It was well you escaped her net; Joseph was hard put to it by
  • her, and he escaped her as you did; but it had like to have cost
  • him his life. [Gen. 39:11-13] But what did she do to you?
  • FAITH. You cannot think, but that you know something, what a
  • flattering tongue she had; she lay at me hard to turn aside with
  • her, promising me all manner of content.
  • CHR. Nay, she did not promise you the content of a good conscience.
  • FAITH. You know what I mean; all carnal and fleshly content.
  • CHR. Thank God you have escaped her: "The abhorred of the Lord
  • shall fall into her ditch." [Ps. 22:14]
  • FAITH. Nay, I know not whether I did wholly escape her or no.
  • CHR. Why, I trow, you did not consent to her desires?
  • FAITH. No, not to defile myself; for I remembered an old writing
  • that I had seen, which said, "Her steps take hold on hell." [Prov.
  • 5:5] So I shut mine eyes, because I would not be bewitched with
  • her looks. [Job 31:1] Then she railed on me, and I went my way.
  • CHR. Did you meet with no other assault as you came?
  • {175} FAITH. When I came to the foot of the hill called Difficulty,
  • I met with a very aged man, who asked me what I was, and whither
  • bound. I told him that I am a pilgrim, going to the Celestial
  • City. Then said the old man, Thou lookest like an honest fellow;
  • wilt thou be content to dwell with me for the wages that I shall
  • give thee? Then I asked him his name, and where he dwelt. He
  • said his name was Adam the First, and that he dwelt in the town
  • of Deceit. [Eph. 4:22] I asked him then what was his work, and
  • what the wages he would give. He told me that his work was many
  • delights; and his wages that I should be his heir at last. I further
  • asked him what house he kept, and what other servants he had. So
  • he told me that his house was maintained with all the dainties in
  • the world; and that his servants were those of his own begetting.
  • Then I asked if he had any children. He said that he had but three
  • daughters: The Lust of the Flesh, The Lust of the Eyes, and The
  • Pride of Life, and that I should marry them all if I would. [1
  • John 2:16] Then I asked how long time he would have me live with
  • him? And he told me, As long as he lived himself.
  • CHR. Well, and what conclusion came the old man and you to at last?
  • FAITH. Why, at first, I found myself somewhat inclinable to go
  • with the man, for I thought he spake very fair; but looking in his
  • forehead, as I talked with him, I saw there written, "Put off the
  • old man with his deeds."
  • CHR. And how then?
  • {176} FAITH. Then it came burning hot into my mind, whatever he
  • said, and however he flattered, when he got me home to his house,
  • he would sell me for a slave. So I bid him forbear to talk, for
  • I would not come near the door of his house. Then he reviled me,
  • and told me that he would send such a one after me, that should
  • make my way bitter to my soul. So I turned to go away from him;
  • but just as I turned myself to go thence, I felt him take hold of
  • my flesh, and give me such a deadly twitch back, that I thought he
  • had pulled part of me after himself. This made me cry, "O wretched
  • man!" [Rom. 7:24] So I went on my way up the hill.
  • Now when I had got about half-way up, I looked behind, and saw one
  • coming after me, swift as the wind; so he overtook me just about
  • the place where the settle stands.
  • CHR. Just there, said Christian, did I sit down to rest me; but
  • being overcome with sleep, I there lost this roll out of my bosom.
  • {177} FAITH. But, good brother, hear me out. So soon as the man
  • overtook me, he was but a word and a blow, for down he knocked
  • me, and laid me for dead. But when I was a little come to myself
  • again, I asked him wherefore he served me so. He said, because of
  • my secret inclining to Adam the First; and with that he struck me
  • another deadly blow on the breast, and beat me down backward; so
  • I lay at his foot as dead as before. So, when I came to myself
  • again, I cried him mercy; but he said, I know not how to show mercy;
  • and with that he knocked me down again. He had doubtless made an
  • end of me, but that one came by, and bid him forbear.
  • CHR. Who was that that bid him forbear?
  • FAITH. I did not know him at first, but as he went by, I perceived
  • the holes in his hands and in his side; then I concluded that he
  • was our Lord. So I went up the hill.
  • {178} CHR. That man that overtook you was Moses. He spareth none,
  • neither knoweth he how to show mercy to those that transgress his
  • law.
  • FAITH. I know it very well; it was not the first time that he has
  • met with me. It was he that came to me when I dwelt securely at
  • home, and that told me he would burn my house over my head if I
  • stayed there.
  • CHR. But did you not see the house that stood there on the top of
  • the hill, on the side of which Moses met you?
  • FAITH. Yes, and the lions too, before I came at it: but for the
  • lions, I think they were asleep, for it was about noon; and because
  • I had so much of the day before me, I passed by the porter, and
  • came down the hill.
  • CHR. He told me, indeed, that he saw you go by, but I wish you
  • had called at the house, for they would have showed you so many
  • rarities, that you would scarce have forgot them to the day of
  • your death. But pray tell me, Did you meet nobody in the Valley
  • of Humility?
  • {179} FAITH. Yes, I met with one Discontent, who would willingly
  • have persuaded me to go back again with him; his reason was, for
  • that the valley was altogether without honour. He told me, moreover,
  • that there to go was the way to disobey all my friends, as Pride,
  • Arrogancy, Self-conceit, Worldly-glory, with others, who he knew,
  • as he said, would be very much offended, if I made such a fool of
  • myself as to wade through this valley.
  • CHR. Well, and how did you answer him?
  • {180} Faithful's answer to Discontent
  • FAITH. I told him, that although all these that he named might claim
  • kindred of me, and that rightly, for indeed they were my relations
  • according to the flesh; yet since I became a pilgrim, they have
  • disowned me, as I also have rejected them; and therefore they were
  • to me now no more than if they had never been of my lineage.
  • I told him, moreover, that as to this valley, he had quite misrepresented
  • the thing; for before honour is humility, and a haughty spirit
  • before a fall. Therefore, said I, I had rather go through this
  • valley to the honour that was so accounted by the wisest, than
  • choose that which he esteemed most worthy our affections.
  • CHR. Met you with nothing else in that valley?
  • {181} FAITH. Yes, I met with Shame; but of all the men that I met
  • with in my pilgrimage, he, I think, bears the wrong name. The
  • others would be said nay, after a little argumentation, and somewhat
  • else; but this bold-faced Shame would never have done.
  • CHR. Why, what did he say to you?
  • FAITH. What! why, he objected against religion itself; he said it
  • was a pitiful, low, sneaking business for a man to mind religion;
  • he said that a tender conscience was an unmanly thing; and that
  • for a man to watch over his words and ways, so as to tie up himself
  • from that hectoring liberty that the brave spirits of the times
  • accustom themselves unto, would make him the ridicule of the times.
  • He objected also, that but few of the mighty, rich, or wise, were
  • ever of my opinion [1 Cor. 1:26; 3:18; Phil. 3:7,8]; nor any of
  • them neither [John 7:48], before they were persuaded to be fools,
  • and to be of a voluntary fondness, to venture the loss of all, for
  • nobody knows what. He, moreover, objected the base and low estate
  • and condition of those that were chiefly the pilgrims of the times
  • in which they lived: also their ignorance and want of understanding
  • in all natural science. Yea, he did hold me to it at that rate
  • also, about a great many more things than here I relate; as, that
  • it was a shame to sit whining and mourning under a sermon, and
  • a shame to come sighing and groaning home: that it was a shame to
  • ask my neighbour forgiveness for petty faults, or to make restitution
  • where I have taken from any. He said, also, that religion made
  • a man grow strange to the great, because of a few vices, which
  • he called by finer names; and made him own and respect the base,
  • because of the same religious fraternity. And is not this, said
  • he, a shame?
  • {182} CHR. And what did you say to him?
  • FAITH. Say! I could not tell what to say at the first. Yea, he
  • put me so to it, that my blood came up in my face; even this Shame
  • fetched it up, and had almost beat me quite off. But at last I
  • began to consider, that "that which is highly esteemed among men,
  • is had in abomination with God." [Luke 16:15] And I thought again,
  • this Shame tells me what men are; but it tells me nothing what God
  • or the Word of God is. And I thought, moreover, that at the day
  • of doom, we shall not be doomed to death or life according to the
  • hectoring spirits of the world, but according to the wisdom and
  • law of the Highest. Therefore, thought I, what God says is best,
  • indeed is best, though all the men in the world are against it.
  • Seeing, then, that God prefers his religion; seeing God prefers a
  • tender conscience; seeing they that make themselves fools for the
  • kingdom of heaven are wisest; and that the poor man that loveth
  • Christ is richer than the greatest man in the world that hates
  • him; Shame, depart, thou art an enemy to my salvation! Shall I
  • entertain thee against my sovereign Lord? How then shall I look
  • him in the face at his coming? Should I now be ashamed of his
  • ways and servants, how can I expect the blessing? [Mark 8:38] But,
  • indeed, this Shame was a bold villain; I could scarce shake him
  • out of my company; yea, he would be haunting of me, and continually
  • whispering me in the ear, with some one or other of the infirmities
  • that attend religion; but at last I told him it was but in vain to
  • attempt further in this business; for those things that he disdained,
  • in those did I see most glory; and so at last I got past this
  • importunate one. And when I had shaken him off, then I began to
  • sing--
  • The trials that those men do meet withal,
  • That are obedient to the heavenly call,
  • Are manifold, and suited to the flesh,
  • And come, and come, and come again afresh;
  • That now, or sometime else, we by them may
  • Be taken, overcome, and cast away.
  • Oh, let the pilgrims, let the pilgrims, then
  • Be vigilant, and quit themselves like men.
  • {183} CHR. I am glad, my brother, that thou didst withstand this
  • villain so bravely; for of all, as thou sayest, I think he has the
  • wrong name; for he is so bold as to follow us in the streets, and
  • to attempt to put us to shame before all men: that is, to make us
  • ashamed of that which is good; but if he was not himself audacious,
  • he would never attempt to do as he does. But let us still resist
  • him; for notwithstanding all his bravadoes, he promoteth the fool
  • and none else. "The wise shall inherit glory, said Solomon, but
  • shame shall be the promotion of fools." [Prov. 3:35]
  • FAITH. I think we must cry to Him for help against Shame, who would
  • have us to be valiant for the truth upon the earth.
  • CHR. You say true; but did you meet nobody else in that valley?
  • FAITH. No, not I; for I had sunshine all the rest of the way through
  • that, and also through the Valley of the Shadow of Death.
  • {184} CHR. It was well for you. I am sure it fared far otherwise
  • with me; I had for a long season, as soon almost as I entered into
  • that valley, a dreadful combat with that foul fiend Apollyon; yea,
  • I thought verily he would have killed me, especially when he got
  • me down and crushed me under him, as if he would have crushed me
  • to pieces; for as he threw me, my sword flew out of my hand; nay,
  • he told me he was sure of me: but I cried to God, and he heard
  • me, and delivered me out of all my troubles. Then I entered into
  • the Valley of the Shadow of Death, and had no light for almost half
  • the way through it. I thought I should have been killed there,
  • over and over; but at last day broke, and the sun rose, and I went
  • through that which was behind with far more ease and quiet.
  • {185} Moreover, I saw in my dream, that as they went on, Faithful,
  • as he chanced to look on one side, saw a man whose name is Talkative,
  • walking at a distance beside them; for in this place there was room
  • enough for them all to walk. He was a tall man, and something more
  • comely at a distance than at hand. To this man Faithful addressed
  • himself in this manner:
  • FAITH. Friend, whither away? Are you going to the heavenly country?
  • TALK. I am going to the same place.
  • FAITH. That is well; then I hope we may have your good company.
  • TALK. With a very good will will I be your companion.
  • {186} FAITH. Come on, then, and let us go together, and let us
  • spend our time in discoursing of things that are profitable.
  • Talkative's dislike of bad discourse
  • TALK. To talk of things that are good, to me is very acceptable,
  • with you or with any other; and I am glad that I have met with those
  • that incline to so good a work; for, to speak the truth, there are
  • but few that care thus to spend their time, (as they are in their
  • travels), but choose much rather to be speaking of things to no
  • profit; and this hath been a trouble for me.
  • FAITH. That is indeed a thing to be lamented; for what things so
  • worthy of the use of the tongue and mouth of men on earth as are
  • the things of the God of heaven?
  • TALK. I like you wonderful well, for your sayings are full of
  • conviction; and I will add, what thing is so pleasant, and what
  • so profitable, as to talk of the things of God? What things so
  • pleasant (that is, if a man hath any delight in things that are
  • wonderful)? For instance, if a man doth delight to talk of the
  • history or the mystery of things; or if a man doth love to talk of
  • miracles, wonders, or signs, where shall he find things recorded
  • so delightful, and so sweetly penned, as in the Holy Scripture?
  • {187} FAITH. That is true; but to be profited by such things in
  • our talk should be that which we design.
  • Talkative's fine discourse
  • TALK. That is it that I said; for to talk of such things is most
  • profitable; for by so doing, a man may get knowledge of many things;
  • as of the vanity of earthly things, and the benefit of things above.
  • Thus, in general, but more particularly by this, a man may learn
  • the necessity of the new birth, the insufficiency of our works,
  • the need of Christ's righteousness, &c. Besides, by this a man
  • may learn, by talk, what it is to repent, to believe, to pray,
  • to suffer, or the like; by this also a man may learn what are the
  • great promises and consolations of the gospel, to his own comfort.
  • Further, by this a man may learn to refute false opinions, to
  • vindicate the truth, and also to instruct the ignorant.
  • FAITH. All this is true, and glad am I to hear these things from
  • you.
  • TALK. Alas! the want of this is the cause why so few understand
  • the need of faith, and the necessity of a work of grace in their
  • soul, in order to eternal life; but ignorantly live in the works
  • of the law, by which a man can by no means obtain the kingdom of
  • heaven.
  • {188} FAITH. But, by your leave, heavenly knowledge of these is the
  • gift of God; no man attaineth to them by human industry, or only
  • by the talk of them.
  • TALK. All this I know very well; for a man can receive nothing,
  • except it be given him from Heaven; all is of grace, not of works.
  • I could give you a hundred scriptures for the confirmation of this.
  • FAITH. Well, then, said Faithful, what is that one thing that we
  • shall at this time found our discourse upon?
  • TALK. What you will. I will talk of things heavenly, or things
  • earthly; things moral, or things evangelical; things sacred, or
  • things profane; things past, or things to come; things foreign, or
  • things at home; things more essential, or things circumstantial;
  • provided that all be done to our profit.
  • {189} FAITH. Now did Faithful begin to wonder; and stepping to
  • Christian, (for he walked all this while by himself), he said to
  • him, (but softly), What a brave companion have we got! Surely this
  • man will make a very excellent pilgrim.
  • CHR. At this Christian modestly smiled, and said, This man, with
  • whom you are so taken, will beguile, with that tongue of his, twenty
  • of them that know him not.
  • FAITH. Do you know him, then?
  • {190} CHR. Know him! Yes, better than he knows himself.
  • FAITH. Pray, what is he?
  • CHR. His name is Talkative; he dwelleth in our town. I wonder that
  • you should be a stranger to him, only I consider that our town is
  • large.
  • FAITH. Whose son is he? And whereabout does he dwell?
  • CHR. He is the son of one Say-well; he dwelt in Prating Row; and is
  • known of all that are acquainted with him, by the name of Talkative
  • in Prating Row; and notwithstanding his fine tongue, he is but a
  • sorry fellow.
  • {191} FAITH. Well, he seems to be a very pretty man.
  • CHR. That is, to them who have not thorough acquaintance with him;
  • for he is best abroad; near home, he is ugly enough. Your saying
  • that he is a pretty man, brings to my mind what I have observed in
  • the work of the painter, whose pictures show best at a distance,
  • but, very near, more unpleasing.
  • {192} FAITH. But I am ready to think you do but jest, because you
  • smiled.
  • CHR. God forbid that I should jest (although I smiled) in this
  • matter, or that I should accuse any falsely! I will give you
  • a further discovery of him. This man is for any company, and for
  • any talk; as he talketh now with you, so will he talk when he is on
  • the ale-bench; and the more drink he hath in his crown, the more
  • of these things he hath in his mouth; religion hath no place in his
  • heart, or house, or conversation; all he hath lieth in his tongue,
  • and his religion is, to make a noise therewith.
  • {193} FAITH. Say you so! then am I in this man greatly deceived.
  • CHR. Deceived! you may be sure of it; remember the proverb, "They
  • say and do not." [Matt. 23:3] But the kingdom of God is not in
  • word, but in Power. [1 Cor 4:20] He talketh of prayer, of repentance,
  • of faith, and of the new birth; but he knows but only to talk of
  • them. I have been in his family, and have observed him both at
  • home and abroad; and I know what I say of him is the truth. His
  • house is as empty of religion as the white of an egg is of savour.
  • There is there neither prayer nor sign of repentance for sin; yea,
  • the brute in his kind serves God far better than he. He is the
  • very stain, reproach, and shame of religion, to all that know him;
  • it can hardly have a good word in all that end of the town where
  • he dwells, through him. [Rom. 2:24,25] Thus say the common people
  • that know him, A saint abroad, and a devil at home. His poor
  • family finds it so; he is such a churl, such a railer at and so
  • unreasonable with his servants, that they neither know how to do
  • for or speak to him. Men that have any dealings with him say it is
  • better to deal with a Turk than with him; for fairer dealing they
  • shall have at their hands. This Talkative (if it be possible) will
  • go beyond them, defraud, beguile, and overreach them. Besides, he
  • brings up his sons to follow his steps; and if he findeth in any of
  • them a foolish timorousness, (for so he calls the first appearance
  • of a tender conscience,) he calls them fools and blockheads, and by
  • no means will employ them in much, or speak to their commendations
  • before others. For my part, I am of opinion, that he has, by his
  • wicked life, caused many to stumble and fall; and will be, if God
  • prevent not, the ruin of many more.
  • {194} FAITH. Well, my brother, I am bound to believe you; not only
  • because you say you know him, but also because, like a Christian,
  • you make your reports of men. For I cannot think that you speak
  • these things of ill-will, but because it is even so as you say.
  • CHR. Had I known him no more than you, I might perhaps have thought
  • of him, as, at the first, you did; yea, had he received this report
  • at their hands only that are enemies to religion, I should have
  • thought it had been a slander,--a lot that often falls from bad
  • men's mouths upon good men's names and professions; but all these
  • things, yea, and a great many more as bad, of my own knowledge,
  • I can prove him guilty of. Besides, good men are ashamed of him;
  • they can neither call him brother, nor friend; the very naming of
  • him among them makes them blush, if they know him.
  • {195} FAITH. Well, I see that saying and doing are two things, and
  • hereafter I shall better observe this distinction.
  • CHR. They are two things, indeed, and are as diverse as are the
  • soul and the body; for as the body without the soul is but a dead
  • carcass, so saying, if it be alone, is but a dead carcass also.
  • The soul of religion is the practical part: "Pure religion
  • and undefiled, before God and the Father, is this, To visit the
  • fatherless and widows in their affliction, and to keep himself
  • unspotted from the world." [James 1:27; see vv. 22-26] This
  • Talkative is not aware of; he thinks that hearing and saying will
  • make a good Christian, and thus he deceiveth his own soul. Hearing
  • is but as the sowing of the seed; talking is not sufficient to
  • prove that fruit is indeed in the heart and life; and let us assure
  • ourselves, that at the day of doom men shall be judged according
  • to their fruits. [Matt. 13, 25] It will not be said then, Did you
  • believe? but, Were you doers, or talkers only? and accordingly
  • shall they be judged. The end of the world is compared to our
  • harvest; and you know men at harvest regard nothing but fruit.
  • Not that anything can be accepted that is not of faith, but I speak
  • this to show you how insignificant the profession of Talkative will
  • be at that day.
  • {196} FAITH. This brings to my mind that of Moses, by which he
  • describeth the beast that is clean. [Lev. 11:3-7; Deut. 14:6-8]
  • He is such a one that parteth the hoof and cheweth the cud; not
  • that parteth the hoof only, or that cheweth the cud only. The
  • hare cheweth the cud, but yet is unclean, because he parteth not
  • the hoof. And this truly resembleth Talkative; he cheweth the cud,
  • he seeketh knowledge, he cheweth upon the word; but he divideth
  • not the hoof, he parteth not with the way of sinners; but, as the
  • hare, he retaineth the foot of a dog or bear, and therefore he is
  • unclean.
  • CHR. You have spoken, for aught I know, the true gospel sense
  • of those texts. And I will add another thing: Paul calleth some
  • men, yea, and those great talkers, too, sounding brass and tinkling
  • cymbals; that is, as he expounds them in another place, things
  • without life, giving sound. [1 Cor. 13:1-3; 14:7] Things without
  • life, that is, without the true faith and grace of the gospel;
  • and consequently, things that shall never be placed in the kingdom
  • of heaven among those that are the children of life; though their
  • sound, by their talk, be as if it were the tongue or voice of an
  • angel.
  • FAITH. Well, I was not so fond of his company at first, but I am
  • as sick of it now. What shall we do to be rid of him?
  • CHR. Take my advice, and do as I bid you, and you shall find that
  • he will soon be sick of your company too, except God shall touch
  • his heart, and turn it.
  • FAITH. What would you have me to do?
  • CHR. Why, go to him, and enter into some serious discourse about
  • the power of religion; and ask him plainly (when he has approved
  • of it, for that he will) whether this thing be set up in his heart,
  • house, or conversation.
  • {197} FAITH. Then Faithful stepped forward again, and said to
  • Talkative, Come, what cheer? How is it now?
  • TALK. Thank you, well. I thought we should have had a great deal
  • of talk by this time.
  • {198} FAITH. Well, if you will, we will fall to it now; and since
  • you left it with me to state the question, let it be this: How doth
  • the saving grace of God discover itself when it is in the heart of
  • man?
  • Talkative's false discovery of a work of grace
  • TALK. I perceive, then, that our talk must be about the power of
  • things. Well, it is a very good question, and I shall be willing
  • to answer you. And take my answer in brief, thus: First, Where
  • the grace of God is in the heart, it causeth there a great outcry
  • against sin. Secondly--
  • FAITH. Nay, hold, let us consider of one at once. I think you
  • should rather say, It shows itself by inclining the soul to abhor
  • its sin.
  • TALK. Why, what difference is there between crying out against,
  • and abhorring of sin?
  • {199} FAITH. Oh, a great deal. A man may cry out against sin of
  • policy, but he cannot abhor it, but by virtue of a godly antipathy
  • against it. I have heard many cry out against sin in the pulpit,
  • who yet can abide it well enough in the heart, house, and conversation.
  • Joseph's mistress cried out with a loud voice, as if she had been
  • very holy; but she would willingly, notwithstanding that, have
  • committed uncleanness with him. Some cry out against sin even as
  • the mother cries out against her child in her lap, when she calleth
  • it slut and naughty girl, and then falls to hugging and kissing
  • it.
  • TALK. You lie at the catch, I perceive.
  • {200} FAITH. No, not I; I am only for setting things right. But
  • what is the second thing whereby you would prove a discovery of a
  • work of grace in the heart?
  • TALK. Great knowledge of gospel mysteries.
  • FAITH. This sign should have been first; but first or last, it is
  • also false; for knowledge, great knowledge, may be obtained in the
  • mysteries of the gospel, and yet no work of grace in the soul. [1
  • Cor. 13] Yea, if a man have all knowledge, he may yet be nothing,
  • and so consequently be no child of God. When Christ said, "Do you
  • know all these things?" and the disciples had answered, Yes; he
  • addeth, "Blessed are ye if ye do them." He doth not lay the blessing
  • in the knowing of them, but in the doing of them. For there is
  • a knowledge that is not attended with doing: He that knoweth his
  • masters will, and doeth it not. A man may know like an angel, and
  • yet be no Christian, therefore your sign of it is not true. Indeed,
  • to know is a thing that pleaseth talkers and boasters, but to do is
  • that which pleaseth God. Not that the heart can be good without
  • knowledge; for without that, the heart is naught. There is,
  • therefore, knowledge and knowledge. Knowledge that resteth in the
  • bare speculation of things; and knowledge that is accompanied with
  • the grace of faith and love; which puts a man upon doing even the
  • will of God from the heart: the first of these will serve the
  • talker; but without the other the true Christian is not content.
  • "Give me understanding, and I shall keep thy law; yea, I shall
  • observe it with my whole heart." [Ps. 119:34]
  • TALK. You lie at the catch again; this is not for edification.
  • FAITH. Well, if you please, propound another sign how this work of
  • grace discovereth itself where it is.
  • TALK. Not I, for I see we shall not agree.
  • FAITH. Well, if you will not, will you give me leave to do it?
  • TALK. You may use your liberty.
  • {201} FAITH. A work of grace in the soul discovereth itself, either
  • to him that hath it, or to standers by.
  • To him that hath it thus: It gives him conviction of sin, especially
  • of the defilement of his nature and the sin of unbelief, (for the
  • sake of which he is sure to be damned, if he findeth not mercy at
  • God's hand, by faith in Jesus Christ [John 16:8, Rom. 7:24, John
  • 16:9, Mark 16:16]). This sight and sense of things worketh in him
  • sorrow and shame for sin; he findeth, moreover, revealed in him the
  • Saviour of the world, and the absolute necessity of closing with
  • him for life, at the which he findeth hungerings and thirstings
  • after him; to which hungerings, &c., the promise is made. [Ps.
  • 38:18, Jer. 31:19, Gal. 2:16, Acts 4:12, Matt. 5:6, Rev. 21:6]
  • Now, according to the strength or weakness of his faith in his
  • Saviour, so is his joy and peace, so is his love to holiness, so
  • are his desires to know him more, and also to serve him in this
  • world. But though I say it discovereth itself thus unto him, yet
  • it is but seldom that he is able to conclude that this is a work
  • of grace; because his corruptions now, and his abused reason, make
  • his mind to misjudge in this matter; therefore, in him that hath
  • this work, there is required a very sound judgement before he can,
  • with steadiness, conclude that this is a work of grace.
  • {202} To others, it is thus discovered:
  • 1. By an experimental confession of his faith in Christ. [Rom.
  • 10:10, Phil. 1:27, Matt. 5:19]
  • 2. By a life answerable to that confession; to wit, a life of
  • holiness, heart-holiness, family-holiness, (if he hath a family),
  • and by conversation-holiness in the world which, in the general,
  • teacheth him, inwardly, to abhor his sin, and himself for that, in
  • secret; to suppress it in his family and to promote holiness in
  • the world; not by talk only, as a hypocrite or talkative person may
  • do, but by a practical subjection, in faith and love, to the power
  • of the Word. [John 14:15, Ps. 50:23, Job 42:5-6, Eze. 20:43]
  • And now, Sir, as to this brief description of the work of grace,
  • and also the discovery of it, if you have aught to object, object;
  • if not, then give me leave to propound to you a second question.
  • {203} TALK. Nay, my part is not now to object, but to hear; let
  • me, therefore, have your second question.
  • FAITH. It is this: Do you experience this first part of this
  • description of it? and doth your life and conversation testify the
  • same? or standeth your religion in word or in tongue, and not in
  • deed and truth? Pray, if you incline to answer me in this, say
  • no more than you know the God above will say Amen to; and also
  • nothing but what your conscience can justify you in; for not he
  • that commendeth himself is approved, but whom the Lord commendeth.
  • Besides, to say I am thus and thus, when my conversation, and all
  • my neighbours, tell me I lie, is great wickedness.
  • {204} TALK. Then Talkative at first began to blush; but, recovering
  • himself, thus he replied: You come now to experience, to conscience,
  • and God; and to appeal to him for justification of what is spoken.
  • This kind of discourse I did not expect; nor am I disposed to
  • give an answer to such questions, because I count not myself bound
  • thereto, unless you take upon you to be a catechiser, and, though
  • you should so do, yet I may refuse to make you my judge. But, I
  • pray, will you tell me why you ask me such questions?
  • {205} FAITH. Because I saw you forward to talk, and because I knew
  • not that you had aught else but notion. Besides, to tell you all
  • the truth, I have heard of you, that you are a man whose religion
  • lies in talk, and that your conversation gives this your mouth-profession
  • the lie.
  • Faithful's plain dealing with Talkative
  • They say, you are a spot among Christians; and that religion fareth
  • the worse for your ungodly conversation; that some have already
  • stumbled at your wicked ways, and that more are in danger of being
  • destroyed thereby; your religion, and an ale-house, and covetousness,
  • and uncleanness, and swearing, and lying, and vain-company keeping,
  • &c., will stand together. The proverb is true of you which is
  • said of a whore, to wit, that she is a shame to all women; so are
  • you a shame to all professors.
  • TALK. Since you are ready to take up reports and to judge so rashly
  • as you do, I cannot but conclude you are some peevish or melancholy
  • man, not fit to be discoursed with; and so adieu.
  • {206} CHR. Then came up Christian, and said to his brother, I told
  • you how it would happen: your words and his lusts could not agree;
  • he had rather leave your company than reform his life. But he is
  • gone, as I said; let him go, the loss is no man's but his own; he
  • has saved us the trouble of going from him; for he continuing (as
  • I suppose he will do) as he is, he would have been but a blot in our
  • company: besides, the apostle says, "From such withdraw thyself."
  • FAITH. But I am glad we had this little discourse with him; it
  • may happen that he will think of it again: however, I have dealt
  • plainly with him, and so am clear of his blood, if he perisheth.
  • {207} CHR. You did well to talk so plainly to him as you did;
  • there is but little of this faithful dealing with men now-a-days,
  • and that makes religion to stink so in the nostrils of many, as it
  • doth; for they are these talkative fools whose religion is only in
  • word, and are debauched and vain in their conversation, that (being
  • so much admitted into the fellowship of the godly) do puzzle the
  • world, blemish Christianity, and grieve the sincere. I wish that
  • all men would deal with such as you have done: then should they
  • either be made more conformable to religion, or the company of
  • saints would be too hot for them. Then did Faithful say,
  • How Talkative at first lifts up his plumes!
  • How bravely doth he speak! How he presumes
  • To drive down all before him! But so soon
  • As Faithful talks of heart-work, like the moon
  • That's past the full, into the wane he goes.
  • And so will all, but he that HEART-WORK knows.
  • {208} Thus they went on talking of what they had seen by the way,
  • and so made that way easy which would otherwise, no doubt, have
  • been tedious to them; for now they went through a wilderness.
  • {209} Now, when they were got almost quite out of this wilderness,
  • Faithful chanced to cast his eye back, and espied one coming after
  • them, and he knew him. Oh! said Faithful to his brother, who
  • comes yonder? Then Christian looked, and said, It is my good friend
  • Evangelist. Ay, and my good friend too, said Faithful, for it was
  • he that set me in the way to the gate. Now was Evangelist come up
  • to them, and thus saluted them:
  • {210} EVAN. Peace be with you, dearly beloved; and peace be to your
  • helpers.
  • CHR. Welcome, welcome, my good Evangelist, the sight of
  • thy countenance brings to my remembrance thy ancient kindness and
  • unwearied labouring for my eternal good.
  • FAITH. And a thousand times welcome, said good Faithful. Thy
  • company, O sweet Evangelist, how desirable it is to us poor pilgrims!
  • EVAN. Then said Evangelist, How hath it fared with you, my friends,
  • since the time of our last parting? What have you met with, and
  • how have you behaved yourselves?
  • {211} Then Christian and Faithful told him of all things that had
  • happened to them in the way; and how, and with what difficulty,
  • they had arrived at that place.
  • {212} EVAN. Right glad am I, said Evangelist, not that you have
  • met with trials, but that you have been victors; and for that you
  • have, notwithstanding many weaknesses, continued in the way to this
  • very day.
  • I say, right glad am I of this thing, and that for mine own sake
  • and yours. I have sowed, and you have reaped: and the day is
  • coming, when both he that sowed and they that reaped shall rejoice
  • together; that is, if you hold out: "for in due season ye shall
  • reap, if ye faint not." [John 4:36, Gal. 6:9] The crown is before
  • you, and it is an incorruptible one; so run, that you may obtain
  • it. [1 Cor. 9:24-27] Some there be that set out for this crown,
  • and, after they have gone far for it, another comes in, and takes
  • it from them: hold fast, therefore, that you have; let no man
  • take your crown. [Rev. 3:11] You are not yet out of the gun-shot
  • of the devil; you have not resisted unto blood, striving against
  • sin; let the kingdom be always before you, and believe steadfastly
  • concerning things that are invisible. Let nothing that is on this
  • side the other world get within you; and, above all, look well to
  • your own hearts, and to the lusts thereof, "for they are deceitful
  • above all things, and desperately wicked"; set your faces like a
  • flint; you have all power in heaven and earth on your side.
  • {213} CHR. Then Christian thanked him for his exhortation; but
  • told him, withal, that they would have him speak further to them
  • for their help the rest of the way, and the rather, for that they
  • well knew that he was a prophet, and could tell them of things that
  • might happen unto them, and also how they might resist and overcome
  • them. To which request Faithful also consented. So Evangelist
  • began as followeth:--
  • EVAN. My sons, you have heard, in the words of the truth of
  • the gospel, that you must, through many tribulations, enter into
  • the kingdom of heaven. And, again, that in every city bonds and
  • afflictions abide in you; and therefore you cannot expect that you
  • should go long on your pilgrimage without them, in some sort or
  • other. You have found something of the truth of these testimonies
  • upon you already, and more will immediately follow; for now, as
  • you see, you are almost out of this wilderness, and therefore you
  • will soon come into a town that you will by and by see before you;
  • and in that town you will be hardly beset with enemies, who will
  • strain hard but they will kill you; and be you sure that one or
  • both of you must seal the testimony which you hold, with blood; but
  • be you faithful unto death, and the King will give you a crown of
  • life.
  • {214} He that shall die there, although his death will be unnatural,
  • and his pain perhaps great, he will yet have the better of his
  • fellow; not only because he will be arrived at the Celestial City
  • soonest, but because he will escape many miseries that the other
  • will meet with in the rest of his journey. But when you are come
  • to the town, and shall find fulfilled what I have here related,
  • then remember your friend, and quit yourselves like men, and commit
  • the keeping of your souls to your God in well-doing, as unto a
  • faithful Creator.
  • {215} Then I saw in my dream, that when they were got out of the
  • wilderness, they presently saw a town before them, and the name of
  • that town is Vanity; and at the town there is a fair kept, called
  • Vanity Fair: it is kept all the year long. It beareth the name
  • of Vanity Fair because the town where it is kept is lighter than
  • vanity; and, also because all that is there sold, or that cometh
  • thither, is vanity. As is the saying of the wise, "all that cometh
  • is vanity." [Eccl. 1; 2:11,17; 11:8; Isa. 11:17]
  • {216} This fair is no new-erected business, but a thing of ancient
  • standing; I will show you the original of it.
  • Almost five thousand years agone, there were pilgrims walking to
  • the Celestial City, as these two honest persons are: and Beelzebub,
  • Apollyon, and Legion, with their companions, perceiving by the
  • path that the pilgrims made, that their way to the city lay through
  • this town of Vanity, they contrived here to set up a fair; a fair
  • wherein, should be sold all sorts of vanity, and that it should last
  • all the year long: therefore at this fair are all such merchandise
  • sold, as houses, lands, trades, places, honours, preferments, titles,
  • countries, kingdoms, lusts, pleasures, and delights of all sorts,
  • as whores, bawds, wives, husbands, children, masters, servants,
  • lives, blood, bodies, souls, silver, gold, pearls, precious stones,
  • and what not.
  • And, moreover, at this fair there is at all times to be seen juggling
  • cheats, games, plays, fools, apes, knaves, and rogues, and that of
  • every kind.
  • Here are to be seen, too, and that for nothing, thefts, murders,
  • adulteries, false swearers, and that of a blood-red colour.
  • {217} And as in other fairs of less moment, there are the several
  • rows and streets, under their proper names, where such and such
  • wares are vended; so here likewise you have the proper places,
  • rows, streets, (viz. countries and kingdoms), where the wares of
  • this fair are soonest to be found. Here is the Britain Row, the
  • French Row, the Italian Row, the Spanish Row, the German Row, where
  • several sorts of vanities are to be sold. But, as in other fairs,
  • some one commodity is as the chief of all the fair, so the ware
  • of Rome and her merchandise is greatly promoted in this fair; only
  • our English nation, with some others, have taken a dislike thereat.
  • {218} Now, as I said, the way to the Celestial City lies just
  • through this town where this lusty fair is kept; and he that will
  • go to the city, and yet not go through this town, must needs go out
  • of the world. [1 Cor. 5:10] The Prince of princes himself, when
  • here, went through this town to his own country, and that upon a
  • fair day too; yea, and as I think, it was Beelzebub, the chief lord
  • of this fair, that invited him to buy of his vanities; yea, would
  • have made him lord of the fair, would he but have done him reverence
  • as he went through the town. [Matt. 4:8, Luke 4:5-7] Yea, because
  • he was such a person of honour, Beelzebub had him from street to
  • street, and showed him all the kingdoms of the world in a little
  • time, that he might, if possible, allure the Blessed One to cheapen
  • and buy some of his vanities; but he had no mind to the merchandise,
  • and therefore left the town, without laying out so much as one
  • farthing upon these vanities. This fair, therefore, is an ancient
  • thing, of long standing, and a very great fair.
  • {219} Now these pilgrims, as I said, must needs go through this
  • fair. Well, so they did: but, behold, even as they entered into
  • the fair, all the people in the fair were moved, and the town
  • itself as it were in a hubbub about them; and that for several
  • reasons: for--
  • {220} First, The pilgrims were clothed with such kind of raiment
  • as was diverse from the raiment of any that traded in that fair.
  • The people, therefore, of the fair, made a great gazing upon them:
  • some said they were fools, some they were bedlams, and some they
  • are outlandish men. [1 Cor. 2:7-8]
  • {221} Secondly, And as they wondered at their apparel, so they did
  • likewise at their speech; for few could understand what they said;
  • they naturally spoke the language of Canaan, but they that kept
  • the fair were the men of this world; so that, from one end of the
  • fair to the other, they seemed barbarians each to the other.
  • {222} Thirdly, But that which did not a little amuse the merchandisers
  • was, that these pilgrims set very light by all their wares; they
  • cared not so much as to look upon them; and if they called upon them
  • to buy, they would put their fingers in their ears, and cry, Turn
  • away mine eyes from beholding vanity, and look upwards, signifying
  • that their trade and traffic was in heaven. [Ps. 119:37, Phil.
  • 3:19-20]
  • {223} One chanced mockingly, beholding the carriage of the men, to
  • say unto them, What will ye buy? But they, looking gravely upon
  • him, answered, "We buy the truth." [Prov. 23:23] At that there
  • was an occasion taken to despise the men the more; some mocking,
  • some taunting, some speaking reproachfully, and some calling upon
  • others to smite them. At last things came to a hubbub and great
  • stir in the fair, insomuch that all order was confounded. Now was
  • word presently brought to the great one of the fair, who quickly
  • came down, and deputed some of his most trusty friends to take these
  • men into examination, about whom the fair was almost overturned. So
  • the men were brought to examination; and they that sat upon them,
  • asked them whence they came, whither they went, and what they did
  • there, in such an unusual garb? The men told them that they were
  • pilgrims and strangers in the world, and that they were going to
  • their own country, which was the heavenly Jerusalem, [Heb. 11:13-16]
  • and that they had given no occasion to the men of the town, nor
  • yet to the merchandisers, thus to abuse them, and to let them in
  • their journey, except it was for that, when one asked them what
  • they would buy, they said they would buy the truth. But they that
  • were appointed to examine them did not believe them to be any other
  • than bedlams and mad, or else such as came to put all things into
  • a confusion in the fair. Therefore they took them and beat them,
  • and besmeared them with dirt, and then put them into the cage, that
  • they might be made a spectacle to all the men of the fair.
  • Behold Vanity Fair! the Pilgrims there
  • Are chain'd and stand beside:
  • Even so it was our Lord pass'd here,
  • And on Mount Calvary died.
  • {224} There, therefore, they lay for some time, and were made the
  • objects of any man's sport, or malice, or revenge, the great one of
  • the fair laughing still at all that befell them. But the men being
  • patient, and not rendering railing for railing, but contrariwise,
  • blessing, and good words for bad, and kindness for injuries done,
  • some men in the fair that were more observing, and less prejudiced
  • than the rest, began to check and blame the baser sort for their
  • continual abuses done by them to the men; they, therefore, in
  • angry manner, let fly at them again, counting them as bad as the
  • men in the cage, and telling them that they seemed confederates, and
  • should be made partakers of their misfortunes. The other replied
  • that, for aught they could see, the men were quiet, and sober, and
  • intended nobody any harm; and that there were many that traded in
  • their fair that were more worthy to be put into the cage, yea, and
  • pillory too, than were the men they had abused. Thus, after divers
  • words had passed on both sides, the men behaving themselves all
  • the while very wisely and soberly before them, they fell to some
  • blows among themselves, and did harm one to another. Then were
  • these two poor men brought before their examiners again, and there
  • charged as being guilty of the late hubbub that had been in the
  • fair. So they beat them pitifully, and hanged irons upon them,
  • and led them in chains up and down the fair, for an example and a
  • terror to others, lest any should speak in their behalf, or join
  • themselves unto them. But Christian and Faithful behaved themselves
  • yet more wisely, and received the ignominy and shame that was
  • cast upon them, with so much meekness and patience, that it won to
  • their side, though but few in comparison of the rest, several of
  • the men in the fair. This put the other party yet into greater
  • rage, insomuch that they concluded the death of these two men.
  • Wherefore they threatened, that the cage nor irons should serve
  • their turn, but that they should die, for the abuse they had done,
  • and for deluding the men of the fair.
  • Then were they remanded to the cage again, until further order
  • should be taken with them. So they put them in, and made their
  • feet fast in the stocks.
  • {225} Here, therefore, they called again to mind what they had heard
  • from their faithful friend Evangelist, and were the more confirmed
  • in their way and sufferings by what he told them would happen to
  • them. They also now comforted each other, that whose lot it was
  • to suffer, even he should have the best of it; therefore each man
  • secretly wished that he might have that preferment: but committing
  • themselves to the all-wise disposal of Him that ruleth all things,
  • with much content, they abode in the condition in which they were,
  • until they should be otherwise disposed of.
  • {226} Then a convenient time being appointed, they brought them
  • forth to their trial, in order to their condemnation. When the
  • time was come, they were brought before their enemies and arraigned.
  • The judge's name was Lord Hate-good. Their indictment was one and
  • the same in substance, though somewhat varying in form, the contents
  • whereof were this:--
  • {227} "That they were enemies to and disturbers of their trade;
  • that they had made commotions and divisions in the town, and had
  • won a party to their own most dangerous opinions, in contempt of
  • the law of their prince."
  • Now, FAITHFUL, play the man, speak for thy God:
  • Fear not the wicked's malice; nor their rod:
  • Speak boldly, man, the truth is on thy side:
  • Die for it, and to life in triumph ride.
  • {228} Faithful's answer for himself
  • Then Faithful began to answer, that he had only set himself against
  • that which hath set itself against Him that is higher than the
  • highest. And, said he, as for disturbance, I make none, being
  • myself a man of peace; the parties that were won to us, were won
  • by beholding our truth and innocence, and they are only turned from
  • the worse to the better. And as to the king you talk of, since he
  • is Beelzebub, the enemy of our Lord, I defy him and all his angels.
  • {229} Then proclamation was made, that they that had aught to say
  • for their lord the king against the prisoner at the bar, should
  • forthwith appear and give in their evidence. So there came in
  • three witnesses, to wit, Envy, Superstition, and Pickthank. They
  • were then asked if they knew the prisoner at the bar; and what they
  • had to say for their lord the king against him.
  • {230} Then stood forth Envy, and said to this effect: My Lord, I
  • have known this man a long time, and will attest upon my oath before
  • this honourable bench, that he is--
  • JUDGE. Hold! Give him his oath. (So they sware him.) Then he said--
  • ENVY. My Lord, this man, notwithstanding his plausible name, is
  • one of the vilest men in our country. He neither regardeth prince
  • nor people, law nor custom; but doth all that he can to possess all
  • men with certain of his disloyal notions, which he in the general
  • calls principles of faith and holiness. And, in particular, I
  • heard him once myself affirm that Christianity and the customs of
  • our town of Vanity were diametrically opposite, and could not be
  • reconciled. By which saying, my Lord, he doth at once not only
  • condemn all our laudable doings, but us in the doing of them.
  • JUDGE. Then did the Judge say to him, Hast thou any more to say?
  • ENVY. My Lord, I could say much more, only I would not be tedious
  • to the court. Yet, if need be, when the other gentlemen have given
  • in their evidence, rather than anything shall be wanting that will
  • despatch him, I will enlarge my testimony against him. So he was
  • bid to stand by. Then they called Superstition, and bid him look
  • upon the prisoner. They also asked, what he could say for their
  • lord the king against him. Then they sware him; so he began.
  • {231} SUPER. My Lord, I have no great acquaintance with this man,
  • nor do I desire to have further knowledge of him; however, this I
  • know, that he is a very pestilent fellow, from some discourse that,
  • the other day, I had with him in this town; for then, talking with
  • him, I heard him say, that our religion was naught, and such by
  • which a man could by no means please God. Which sayings of his, my
  • Lord, your Lordship very well knows, what necessarily thence will
  • follow, to wit, that we do still worship in vain, are yet in our
  • sins, and finally shall be damned; and this is that which I have
  • to say.
  • {232} Then was Pickthank sworn, and bid say what he knew, in behalf
  • of their lord the king, against the prisoner at the bar.
  • Pickthank's testimony
  • PICK. My Lord, and you gentlemen all, This fellow I have known of a
  • long time, and have heard him speak things that ought not to be spoke;
  • for he hath railed on our noble prince Beelzebub, and hath spoken
  • contemptibly of his honourable friends, whose names are the Lord Old
  • Man, the Lord Carnal Delight, the Lord Luxurious, the Lord Desire
  • of Vain Glory, my old Lord Lechery, Sir Having Greedy, with all
  • the rest of our nobility; and he hath said, moreover, That if all
  • men were of his mind, if possible, there is not one of these noblemen
  • should have any longer a being in this town. Besides, he hath not
  • been afraid to rail on you, my Lord, who are now appointed to be
  • his judge, calling you an ungodly villain, with many other such
  • like vilifying terms, with which he hath bespattered most of the
  • gentry of our town.
  • {233} When this Pickthank had told his tale, the Judge directed his
  • speech to the prisoner at the bar, saying, Thou runagate, heretic,
  • and traitor, hast thou heard what these honest gentlemen have
  • witnessed against thee?
  • FAITH. May I speak a few words in my own defence?
  • JUDGE. Sirrah! sirrah! thou deservest to live no longer, but to
  • be slain immediately upon the place; yet, that all men may see our
  • gentleness towards thee, let us hear what thou, vile runagate, hast
  • to say.
  • {234} Faithful's defence of himself
  • FAITH. 1. I say, then, in answer to what Mr. Envy hath spoken,
  • I never said aught but this, That what rule, or laws, or customs,
  • or people, were flat against the Word of God, are diametrically
  • opposite to Christianity. If I have said amiss in this, convince
  • me of my error, and I am ready here before you to make my recantation.
  • {235} 2. As to the second, to wit, Mr. Superstition, and his charge
  • against me, I said only this, That in the worship of God there is
  • required a Divine faith; but there can be no Divine faith without
  • a Divine revelation of the will of God. Therefore, whatever
  • is thrust into the worship of God that is not agreeable to Divine
  • revelation, cannot be done but by a human faith, which faith will
  • not be profitable to eternal life.
  • {236} 3. As to what Mr. Pickthank hath said, I say (avoiding terms,
  • as that I am said to rail, and the like) that the prince of this
  • town, with all the rabblement, his attendants, by this gentleman
  • named, are more fit for a being in hell, than in this town and
  • country: and so, the Lord have mercy upon me!
  • {237} Then the Judge called to the jury (who all this while stood
  • by, to hear and observe): Gentlemen of the jury, you see this man
  • about whom so great an uproar hath been made in this town. You
  • have also heard what these worthy gentlemen have witnessed against
  • him. Also you have heard his reply and confession. It lieth now
  • in your breasts to hang him or save his life; but yet I think meet
  • to instruct you into our law.
  • {238} There was an Act made in the days of Pharaoh the Great,
  • servant to our prince, that lest those of a contrary religion should
  • multiply and grow too strong for him, their males should be thrown
  • into the river. [Exo. 1:22] There was also an Act made in the
  • days of Nebuchadnezzar the Great, another of his servants, that
  • whosoever would not fall down and worship his golden image, should
  • be thrown into a fiery furnace. [Dan. 3:6] There was also an Act
  • made in the days of Darius, that whoso, for some time, called upon
  • any god but him, should be cast into the lions' den. [Dan. 6]
  • Now the substance of these laws this rebel has broken, not only
  • in thought, (which is not to be borne), but also in word and deed;
  • which must therefore needs be intolerable.
  • {239} For that of Pharaoh, his law was made upon a supposition, to
  • prevent mischief, no crime being yet apparent; but here is a crime
  • apparent. For the second and third, you see he disputeth against
  • our religion; and for the treason he hath confessed, he deserveth
  • to die the death.
  • {240} Then went the jury out, whose names were, Mr. Blind-man, Mr.
  • No-good, Mr. Malice, Mr. Love-lust, Mr. Live-loose, Mr. Heady, Mr.
  • High-mind, Mr. Enmity, Mr. Liar, Mr. Cruelty, Mr. Hate-light, and
  • Mr. Implacable; who every one gave in his private verdict against
  • him among themselves, and afterwards unanimously concluded to bring
  • him in guilty before the Judge. And first, among themselves, Mr.
  • Blind-man, the foreman, said, I see clearly that this man is a
  • heretic. Then said Mr. No-good, Away with such a fellow from the
  • earth. Ay, said Mr. Malice, for I hate the very looks of him.
  • Then said Mr. Love-lust, I could never endure him. Nor I, said Mr.
  • Live-loose, for he would always be condemning my way. Hang him,
  • hang him, said Mr. Heady. A sorry scrub, said Mr. High-mind. My
  • heart riseth against him, said Mr. Enmity. He is a rogue, said
  • Mr. Liar. Hanging is too good for him, said Mr. Cruelty. Let us
  • despatch him out of the way, said Mr. Hate-light. Then said Mr.
  • Implacable, Might I have all the world given me, I could not be
  • reconciled to him; therefore, let us forthwith bring him in guilty
  • of death. And so they did; therefore he was presently condemned
  • to be had from the place where he was, to the place from whence
  • he came, and there to be put to the most cruel death that could be
  • invented.
  • {241} They therefore brought him out, to do with him according to
  • their law; and, first, they scourged him, then they buffeted him,
  • then they lanced his flesh with knives; after that, they stoned
  • him with stones, then pricked him with their swords; and, last of
  • all, they burned him to ashes at the stake. Thus came Faithful to
  • his end.
  • {242} Now I saw that there stood behind the multitude a chariot
  • and a couple of horses, waiting for Faithful, who (so soon as his
  • adversaries had despatched him) was taken up into it, and straightway
  • was carried up through the clouds, with sound of trumpet, the
  • nearest way to the Celestial Gate.
  • Brave FAITHFUL, bravely done in word and deed;
  • Judge, witnesses, and jury have, instead
  • Of overcoming thee, but shown their rage:
  • When they are dead, thou'lt live from age to age*.
  • *In the New Heaven and New Earth. {footnote from one edition}
  • {243} But as for Christian, he had some respite, and was remanded
  • back to prison. So he there remained for a space; but He that
  • overrules all things, having the power of their rage in his own
  • hand, so wrought it about, that Christian for that time escaped
  • them, and went his way. And as he went, he sang, saying--
  • Well, Faithful, thou hast faithfully profest
  • Unto thy Lord; with whom thou shalt be blest,
  • When faithless ones, with all their vain delights,
  • Are crying out under their hellish plights:
  • Sing, Faithful, sing, and let thy name survive;
  • For though they kill'd thee, thou art yet alive!
  • {244} Now I saw in my dream, that Christian went not forth alone,
  • for there was one whose name was Hopeful (being made so by the
  • beholding of Christian and Faithful in their words and behaviour,
  • in their sufferings at the fair), who joined himself unto him, and,
  • entering into a brotherly covenant, told him that he would be his
  • companion. Thus, one died to bear testimony to the truth, and
  • another rises out of his ashes, to be a companion with Christian
  • in his pilgrimage. This Hopeful also told Christian, that there
  • were many more of the men in the fair, that would take their time
  • and follow after.
  • {245} So I saw that quickly after they were got out of the fair,
  • they overtook one that was going before them, whose name was By-ends:
  • so they said to him, What countryman, Sir? and how far go you this
  • way? He told them that he came from the town of Fair-speech, and
  • he was going to the Celestial City (but told them not his name).
  • From Fair-speech! said Christian. Is there any good that lives
  • there? [Prov. 26:25]
  • BY-ENDS. Yes, said By-ends, I hope.
  • CHR. Pray, Sir, what may I call you? said Christian.
  • BY-ENDS. I am a stranger to you, and you to me: if you be going
  • this way, I shall be glad of your company; if not, I must be content.
  • CHR. This town of Fair-speech, said Christian, I have heard of;
  • and, as I remember, they say it is a wealthy place.
  • BY-ENDS. Yes, I will assure you that it is; and I have very many
  • rich kindred there.
  • {246} CHR. Pray, who are your kindred there? if a man may be so
  • bold.
  • BY-ENDS. Almost the whole town; and in particular, my Lord
  • Turn-about, my Lord Time-server, my Lord Fair-speech, (from whose
  • ancestors that town first took its name), also Mr. Smooth-man, Mr.
  • Facing-both-ways, Mr. Any-thing; and the parson of our parish, Mr.
  • Two-tongues, was my mother's own brother by father's side; and to
  • tell you the truth, I am become a gentleman of good quality, yet
  • my great-grandfather was but a waterman, looking one way and rowing
  • another, and I got most of my estate by the same occupation.
  • CHR. Are you a married man?
  • BY-ENDS. Yes, and my wife is a very virtuous woman, the daughter
  • of a virtuous woman; she was my Lady Feigning's daughter, therefore
  • she came of a very honourable family, and is arrived to such a
  • pitch of breeding, that she knows how to carry it to all, even to
  • prince and peasant. It is true we somewhat differ in religion from
  • those of the stricter sort, yet but in two small points: first,
  • we never strive against wind and tide; secondly, we are always most
  • zealous when religion goes in his silver slippers; we love much
  • to walk with him in the street, if the sun shines, and the people
  • applaud him.
  • {247} Then Christian stepped a little aside to his fellow, Hopeful,
  • saying, It runs in my mind that this is one By-ends of Fair-speech;
  • and if it be he, we have as very a knave in our company as dwelleth
  • in all these parts. Then said Hopeful, Ask him; methinks he should
  • not be ashamed of his name. So Christian came up with him again,
  • and said, Sir, you talk as if you knew something more than all the
  • world doth; and if I take not my mark amiss, I deem I have half a
  • guess of you: Is not your name Mr. By-ends, of Fair-speech?
  • BY-ENDS. This is not my name, but indeed it is a nick-name that is
  • given me by some that cannot abide me: and I must be content to
  • bear it as a reproach, as other good men have borne theirs before
  • me.
  • {247} CHR. But did you never give an occasion to men to call you
  • by this name?
  • BY-ENDS. Never, never! The worst that ever I did to give them an
  • occasion to give me this name was, that I had always the luck to
  • jump in my judgment with the present way of the times, whatever it
  • was, and my chance was to get thereby; but if things are thus cast
  • upon me, let me count them, a blessing; but let not the malicious
  • load me therefore with reproach.
  • {248} CHR. I thought, indeed, that you were the man that I heard
  • of; and to tell you what I think, I fear this name belongs to you
  • more properly than you are willing we should think it doth.
  • BY-ENDS. Well, if you will thus imagine, I cannot help it; you
  • shall find me a fair company-keeper, if you will still admit me
  • your associate.
  • CHR. If you will go with us, you must go against wind and tide;
  • the which, I perceive, is against your opinion; you must also own
  • religion in his rags, as well as when in his silver slippers; and
  • stand by him, too, when bound in irons, as well as when he walketh
  • the streets with applause.
  • BY-ENDS. You must not impose, nor lord it over my faith; leave me
  • to my liberty, and let me go with you.
  • CHR. Not a step further, unless you will do in what I propound as
  • we.
  • Then said By-ends, I shall never desert my old principles, since
  • they are harmless and profitable. If I may not go with you, I must
  • do as I did before you overtook me, even go by myself, until some
  • overtake me that will be glad of my company.
  • {249} Now I saw in my dream that Christian and Hopeful forsook him,
  • and kept their distance before him; but one of them looking back,
  • saw three men following Mr. By-ends, and behold, as they came up
  • with him, he made them a very low conge {conge'}; and they also
  • gave him a compliment. The men's names were Mr. Hold-the-world,
  • Mr. Money-love, and Mr. Save-all; men that Mr. By-ends had formerly
  • been acquainted with; for in their minority they were schoolfellows,
  • and were taught by one Mr. Gripe-man, a schoolmaster in Love-gain,
  • which is a market town in the county of Coveting, in the north. This
  • schoolmaster taught them the art of getting, either by violence,
  • cozenage, flattery, lying, or by putting on the guise of religion;
  • and these four gentlemen had attained much of the art of their
  • master, so that they could each of them have kept such a school
  • themselves.
  • {250} Well, when they had, as I said, thus saluted each other, Mr.
  • Money-love said to Mr. By-ends, Who are they upon the road before
  • us? (for Christian and Hopeful were yet within view).
  • By-ends' character of the pilgrims
  • BY-ENDS. They are a couple of far countrymen, that, after their
  • mode, are going on pilgrimage.
  • MONEY-LOVE. Alas! Why did they not stay, that we might have had
  • their good company? for they, and we, and you, Sir, I hope, are
  • all going on pilgrimage.
  • BY-ENDS. We are so, indeed; but the men before us are so rigid,
  • and love so much their own notions, and do also so lightly esteem
  • the opinions of others, that let a man be never so godly, yet if
  • he jumps not with them in all things, they thrust him quite out of
  • their company.
  • {251} SAVE-ALL. That is bad, but we read of some that are righteous
  • overmuch; and such men's rigidness prevails with them to judge and
  • condemn all but themselves. But, I pray, what, and how many, were
  • the things wherein you differed?
  • BY-ENDS. Why, they, after their headstrong manner, conclude that
  • it is duty to rush on their journey all weathers; and I am for
  • waiting for wind and tide. They are for hazarding all for God at
  • a clap; and I am for taking all advantages to secure my life and
  • estate. They are for holding their notions, though all other men
  • are against them; but I am for religion in what, and so far as the
  • times, and my safety, will bear it. They are for religion when
  • in rags and contempt; but I am for him when he walks in his golden
  • slippers, in the sunshine, and with applause.
  • {252} HOLD-THE-WORLD. Ay, and hold you there still, good Mr.
  • By-ends; for, for my part, I can count him but a fool, that, having
  • the liberty to keep what he has, shall be so unwise as to lose it.
  • Let us be wise as serpents; it is best to make hay when the sun
  • shines; you see how the bee lieth still all winter, and bestirs her
  • only when she can have profit with pleasure. God sends sometimes
  • rain, and sometimes sunshine; if they be such fools to go through
  • the first, yet let us be content to take fair weather along with
  • us. For my part, I like that religion best that will stand with
  • the security of God's good blessings unto us; for who can imagine,
  • that is ruled by his reason, since God has bestowed upon us the
  • good things of this life, but that he would have us keep them for
  • his sake? Abraham and Solomon grew rich in religion. And Job
  • says, that a good man shall lay up gold as dust. But he must not
  • be such as the men before us, if they be as you have described
  • them.
  • SAVE-ALL. I think that we are all agreed in this matter, and
  • therefore there needs no more words about it.
  • MONEY-LOVE. No, there needs no more words about this matter, indeed;
  • for he that believes neither Scripture nor reason (and you see we
  • have both on our side) neither knows his own liberty, nor seeks
  • his own safety.
  • {253} BY-ENDS. My brethren, we are, as you see, going all on
  • pilgrimage; and, for our better diversion from things that are bad,
  • give me leave to propound unto you this question:--
  • Suppose a man, a minister, or a tradesman, &c., should have an
  • advantage lie before him, to get the good blessings of this life,
  • yet so as that he can by no means come by them except, in appearance
  • at least, he becomes extraordinarily zealous in some points
  • of religion that he meddled not with before, may he not use these
  • means to attain his end, and yet be a right honest man?
  • {254} MONEY-LOVE. I see the bottom of your question; and, with these
  • gentlemen's good leave, I will endeavour to shape you an answer.
  • And first, to speak to your question as it concerns a minister
  • himself: Suppose a minister, a worthy man, possessed but of a very
  • small benefice, and has in his eye a greater, more fat, and plump
  • by far; he has also now an opportunity of getting of it, yet so as
  • by being more studious, by preaching more frequently and zealously,
  • and, because the temper of the people requires it, by altering
  • of some of his principles; for my part, I see no reason but a man
  • may do this, (provided he has a call), ay, and more a great deal
  • besides, and yet be an honest man. For why--
  • {255} 1. His desire of a greater benefice is lawful, (this cannot
  • be contradicted), since it is set before him by Providence; so then,
  • he may get it, if he can, making no question for conscience' sake.
  • {256} 2. Besides, his desire after that benefice makes him more
  • studious, a more zealous preacher, &c., and so makes him a better
  • man; yea, makes him better improve his parts, which is according
  • to the mind of God.
  • {257} 3. Now, as for his complying with the temper of his people,
  • by dissenting, to serve them, some of his principles, this argueth,
  • (1) That he is of a self-denying, temper; (2) Of a sweet and winning
  • deportment; and so (3) more fit for the ministerial function.
  • {258} 4. I conclude, then, that a minister that changes a small
  • for a great, should not, for so doing, be judged as covetous; but
  • rather, since he has improved in his parts and industry thereby,
  • be counted as one that pursues his call, and the opportunity put
  • into his hands to do good.
  • {259} And now to the second part of the question, which concerns
  • the tradesman you mentioned. Suppose such a one to have but a poor
  • employ in the world, but by becoming religious, he may mend his
  • market, perhaps get a rich wife, or more and far better customers
  • to his shop; for my part, I see no reason but that this may be
  • lawfully done. For why--
  • 1. To become religious is a virtue, by what means soever a man
  • becomes so.
  • 2. Nor is it unlawful to get a rich wife, or more custom to my
  • shop.
  • 3. Besides, the man that gets these by becoming religious, gets
  • that which is good, of them that are good, by becoming good himself;
  • so then here is a good wife, and good customers, and good gain,
  • and all these by becoming religious, which is good; therefore, to
  • become religious, to get all these, is a good and profitable design.
  • {260} This answer, thus made by this Mr. Money-love to Mr. By-ends's
  • question, was highly applauded by them all; wherefore they concluded
  • upon the whole, that it was most wholesome and advantageous. And
  • because, as they thought, no man was able to contradict it, and
  • because Christian and Hopeful were yet within call, they jointly
  • agreed to assault them with the question as soon as they overtook
  • them; and the rather because they had opposed Mr. By-ends before.
  • So they called after them, and they stopped, and stood still till
  • they came up to them; but they concluded, as they went, that not Mr.
  • By-ends, but old Mr. Hold-the-world, should propound the question
  • to them, because, as they supposed, their answer to him would be
  • without the remainder of that heat that was kindled betwixt Mr.
  • By-ends and them, at their parting a little before.
  • {260} So they came up to each other, and after a short salutation,
  • Mr. Hold-the-world propounded the question to Christian and his
  • fellow, and bid them to answer it if they could.
  • CHR. Then said Christian, Even a babe in religion may answer ten
  • thousand such questions. For if it be unlawful to follow Christ for
  • loaves, (as it is in the sixth of John), how much more abominable
  • is it to make of him and religion a stalking-horse to get and enjoy
  • the world! Nor do we find any other than heathens, hypocrites,
  • devils, and witches, that are of this opinion.
  • {261} 1. Heathens; for when Hamor and Shechem had a mind to the
  • daughter and cattle of Jacob, and saw that there was no way for them
  • to come at them, but by becoming circumcised, they say to their
  • companions, If every male of us be circumcised, as they are circumcised,
  • shall not their cattle, and their substance, and every beast of
  • theirs, be ours? Their daughter and their cattle were that which
  • they sought to obtain, and their religion the stalking-horse they
  • made use of to come at them. Read the whole story. [Gen. 34:20-23]
  • {262} 2. The hypocritical Pharisees were also of this religion;
  • long prayers were their pretence, but to get widows' houses was
  • their intent; and greater damnation was from God their judgment.
  • [Luke 20:46-47]
  • {263} 3. Judas the devil was also of this religion; he was religious
  • for the bag, that he might be possessed of what was therein; but
  • he was lost, cast away, and the very son of perdition.
  • {264} 4. Simon the witch was of this religion too; for he would
  • have had the Holy Ghost, that he might have got money therewith;
  • and his sentence from Peter's mouth was according. [Acts 8:19-22]
  • {265} 5. Neither will it out of my mind, but that that man that
  • takes up religion for the world, will throw away religion for
  • the world; for so surely as Judas resigned the world in becoming
  • religious, so surely did he also sell religion and his Master for
  • the same. To answer the question, therefore, affirmatively, as I
  • perceive you have done, and to accept of, as authentic, such answer,
  • is both heathenish, hypocritical, and devilish; and your reward
  • will be according to your works. Then they stood staring one upon
  • another, but had not wherewith to answer Christian. Hopeful also
  • approved of the soundness of Christian's answer; so there was a great
  • silence among them. Mr. By-ends and his company also staggered
  • and kept behind, that Christian and Hopeful might outgo them. Then
  • said Christian to his fellow, If these men cannot stand before the
  • sentence of men, what will they do with the sentence of God? And
  • if they are mute when dealt with by vessels of clay, what will they
  • do when they shall be rebuked by the flames of a devouring fire?
  • {266} Then Christian and Hopeful outwent them again, and went till
  • they came to a delicate plain called Ease, where they went with
  • much content; but that plain was but narrow, so they were quickly
  • got over it. Now at the further side of that plain was a little
  • hill called Lucre, and in that hill a silver mine, which some of
  • them that had formerly gone that way, because of the rarity of it,
  • had turned aside to see; but going too near the brink of the pit,
  • the ground being deceitful under them, broke, and they were slain;
  • some also had been maimed there, and could not, to their dying day,
  • be their own men again.
  • {267} Then I saw in my dream, that a little off the road, over
  • against the silver mine, stood Demas (gentlemanlike) to call to
  • passengers to come and see; who said to Christian and his fellow,
  • Ho! turn aside hither, and I will show you a thing.
  • CHR. What thing so deserving as to turn us out of the way to see
  • it?
  • DEMAS. Here is a silver mine, and some digging in it for treasure.
  • If you will come, with a little pains you may richly provide for
  • yourselves.
  • {268} HOPE. Then said Hopeful, Let us go see.
  • CHR. Not I, said Christian, I have heard of this place before now;
  • and how many have there been slain; and besides that, treasure
  • is a snare to those that seek it; for it hindereth them in their
  • pilgrimage. Then Christian called to Demas, saying, Is not the
  • place dangerous? Hath it not hindered many in their pilgrimage?
  • [Hos. 14:8]
  • DEMAS. Not very dangerous, except to those that are careless, (but
  • withal, he blushed as he spake).
  • CHR. Then said Christian to Hopeful, Let us not stir a step, but
  • still keep on our way.
  • HOPE. I will warrant you, when By-ends comes up, if he hath the
  • same invitation as we, he will turn in thither to see.
  • CHR. No doubt thereof, for his principles lead him that way, and
  • a hundred to one but he dies there.
  • DEMAS. Then Demas called again, saying, But will you not come over
  • and see?
  • {269} CHR. Then Christian roundly answered, saying, Demas, thou
  • art an enemy to the right ways of the Lord of this way, and hast
  • been already condemned for thine own turning aside, by one of His
  • Majesty's judges [2 Tim. 4:10]; and why seekest thou to bring us
  • into the like condemnation? Besides, if we at all turn aside, our
  • Lord and King will certainly hear thereof, and will there put us
  • to shame, where we would stand with boldness before him.
  • Demas cried again, that he also was one of their fraternity; and
  • that if they would tarry a little, he also himself would walk with
  • them.
  • {270} CHR. Then said Christian, What is thy name? Is it not the
  • same by the which I have called thee?
  • DEMAS. Yes, my name is Demas; I am the son of Abraham.
  • CHR. I know you; Gehazi was your great-grandfather, and Judas your
  • father; and you have trod in their steps. [2 Kings 5:20, Matt.
  • 26:14,15, 27:1-5] It is but a devilish prank that thou usest;
  • thy father was hanged for a traitor, and thou deservest no better
  • reward. Assure thyself, that when we come to the King, we will do
  • him word of this thy behaviour. Thus they went their way.
  • {271} By this time By-ends and his companions were come again
  • within sight, and they, at the first beck, went over to Demas. Now,
  • whether they fell into the pit by looking over the brink thereof,
  • or whether they went down to dig, or whether they were smothered in
  • the bottom by the damps that commonly arise, of these things I am
  • not certain; but this I observed, that they never were seen again
  • in the way. Then sang Christian--
  • By-ends and silver Demas both agree;
  • One calls, the other runs, that he may be
  • A sharer in his lucre; so these do
  • Take up in this world, and no further go.
  • {272} Now I saw that, just on the other side of this plain,
  • the pilgrims came to a place where stood an old monument, hard by
  • the highway side, at the sight of which they were both concerned,
  • because of the strangeness of the form thereof; for it seemed
  • to them as if it had been a woman transformed into the shape of a
  • pillar; here, therefore they stood looking, and looking upon it,
  • but could not for a time tell what they should make thereof. At
  • last Hopeful espied written above the head thereof, a writing in
  • an unusual hand; but he being no scholar, called to Christian (for
  • he was learned) to see if he could pick out the meaning; so he came,
  • and after a little laying of letters together, he found the same
  • to be this, "Remember Lot's Wife". So he read it to his fellow;
  • after which they both concluded that that was the pillar of salt into
  • which Lot's wife was turned, for her looking back with a covetous
  • heart, when she was going from Sodom for safety. [Gen. 19:26]
  • Which sudden and amazing sight gave them occasion of this discourse.
  • {273} CHR. Ah, my brother! this is a seasonable sight; it came
  • opportunely to us after the invitation which Demas gave us to come
  • over to view the Hill Lucre; and had we gone over, as he desired
  • us, and as thou wast inclining to do, my brother, we had, for aught
  • I know, been made ourselves like this woman, a spectacle for those
  • that shall come after to behold.
  • HOPE. I am sorry that I was so foolish, and am made to wonder that
  • I am not now as Lot's wife; for wherein was the difference betwixt
  • her sin and mine? She only looked back; and I had a desire to go
  • see. Let grace be adored, and let me be ashamed that ever such a
  • thing should be in mine heart.
  • {274} CHR. Let us take notice of what we see here, for our help
  • for time to come. This woman escaped one judgment, for she fell
  • not by the destruction of Sodom; yet she was destroyed by another,
  • as we see she is turned into a pillar of salt.
  • HOPE. True; and she may be to us both caution and example; caution,
  • that we should shun her sin; or a sign of what judgment will overtake
  • such as shall not be prevented by this caution; so Korah, Dathan,
  • and Abiram, with the two hundred and fifty men that perished in
  • their sin, did also become a sign or example to others to beware.
  • [Num. 26:9,10] But above all, I muse at one thing, to wit, how
  • Demas and his fellows can stand so confidently yonder to look for
  • that treasure, which this woman, but for looking behind her after,
  • (for we read not that she stepped one foot out of the way) was
  • turned into a pillar of salt; especially since the judgment which
  • overtook her did make her an example, within sight of where they
  • are; for they cannot choose but see her, did they but lift up their
  • eyes.
  • {275} CHR. It is a thing to be wondered at, and it argueth that
  • their hearts are grown desperate in the case; and I cannot tell who
  • to compare them to so fitly, as to them that pick pockets in the
  • presence of the judge, or that will cut purses under the gallows.
  • It is said of the men of Sodom, that they were sinners exceedingly,
  • because they were sinners before the Lord, that is, in his eyesight,
  • and notwithstanding the kindnesses that he had showed them [Gen.
  • 13:13]; for the land of Sodom was now like the garden of Eden
  • heretofore. [Gen. 13:10] This, therefore, provoked him the more
  • to jealousy, and made their plague as hot as the fire of the Lord
  • out of heaven could make it. And it is most rationally to be
  • concluded, that such, even such as these are, that shall sin in
  • the sight, yea, and that too in despite of such examples that are
  • set continually before them, to caution them to the contrary, must
  • be partakers of severest judgments.
  • HOPE. Doubtless thou hast said the truth; but what a mercy is it,
  • that neither thou, but especially I, am not made myself this example!
  • This ministereth occasion to us to thank God, to fear before him,
  • and always to remember Lot's wife.
  • {276} I saw, then, that they went on their way to a pleasant river;
  • which David the king called "the river of God", but John, "the
  • river of the water of life". [Ps. 65:9, Rev. 22, Ezek. 47] Now
  • their way lay just upon the bank of the river; here, therefore,
  • Christian and his companion walked with great delight; they drank
  • also of the water of the river, which was pleasant, and enlivening
  • to their weary spirits: besides, on the banks of this river, on
  • either side, were green trees, that bore all manner of fruit; and
  • the leaves of the trees were good for medicine; with the fruit of
  • these trees they were also much delighted; and the leaves they eat
  • to prevent surfeits, and other diseases that are incident to those
  • that heat their blood by travels. On either side of the river was
  • also a meadow, curiously beautified with lilies, and it was green
  • all the year long. In this meadow they lay down, and slept; for
  • here they might lie down safely. When they awoke, they gathered
  • again of the fruit of the trees, and drank again of the water
  • of the river, and then lay down again to sleep. [Ps. 23:2, Isa.
  • 14:30] Thus they did several days and nights. Then they sang--
  • Behold ye how these crystal streams do glide,
  • To comfort pilgrims by the highway side;
  • The meadows green, beside their fragrant smell,
  • Yield dainties for them; and he that can tell
  • What pleasant fruit, yea, leaves, these trees do yield,
  • Will soon sell all, that he may buy this field.
  • So when they were disposed to go on, (for they were not, as yet,
  • at their journey's end,) they ate and drank, and departed.
  • {277} Now, I beheld in my dream, that they had not journeyed far,
  • but the river and the way for a time parted; at which they were
  • not a little sorry; yet they durst not go out of the way. Now the
  • way from the river was rough, and their feet tender, by reason of
  • their travels; so the souls of the pilgrims were much discouraged
  • because of the way. [Num. 21:4] Wherefore, still as they went
  • on, they wished for better way. Now, a little before them, there
  • was on the left hand of the road a meadow, and a stile to go over
  • into it; and that meadow is called By-path Meadow. Then said
  • Christian to his fellow, If this meadow lieth along by our wayside,
  • let us go over into it. Then he went to the stile to see, and
  • behold, a path lay along by the way, on the other side of the fence.
  • It is according to my wish, said Christian. Here is the easiest
  • going; come, good Hopeful, and let us go over.
  • {278} HOPE. But how if this path should lead us out of the way?
  • CHR. That is not like, said the other. Look, doth it not go along
  • by the wayside? So Hopeful, being persuaded by his fellow, went
  • after him over the stile. When they were gone over, and were got
  • into the path, they found it very easy for their feet; and withal,
  • they, looking before them, espied a man walking as they did, (and
  • his name was Vain-confidence); so they called after him, and asked
  • him whither that way led. He said, To the Celestial Gate. Look,
  • said Christian, did not I tell you so? By this you may see we are
  • right. So they followed, and he went before them. But, behold,
  • the night came on, and it grew very dark; so that they that were
  • behind lost the sight of him that went before.
  • {279} He, therefore, that went before, (Vain-confidence by name),
  • not seeing the way before him, fell into a deep pit [Isa. 9:16],
  • which was on purpose there made, by the Prince of those grounds,
  • to catch vain-glorious fools withal, and was dashed in pieces with
  • his fall.
  • {280} Now Christian and his fellow heard him fall. So they called
  • to know the matter, but there was none to answer, only they heard
  • a groaning. Then said Hopeful, Where are we now? Then was his
  • fellow silent, as mistrusting that he had led him out of the way;
  • and now it began to rain, and thunder, and lighten in a very dreadful
  • manner; and the water rose amain.
  • Then Hopeful groaned in himself, saying, Oh, that I had kept on my
  • way!
  • {281} CHR. Who could have thought that this path should have led
  • us out of the way?
  • HOPE. I was afraid on it at the very first, and therefore gave you
  • that gentle caution. I would have spoken plainer, but that you
  • are older than I.
  • Christian's repentance for leading of his brother out of the way
  • CHR. Good brother, be not offended; I am sorry I have brought thee
  • out of the way, and that I have put thee into such imminent danger;
  • pray, my brother, forgive me; I did not do it of an evil intent.
  • HOPE. Be comforted, my brother, for I forgive thee; and believe,
  • too, that this shall be for our good.
  • CHR. I am glad I have with me a merciful brother; but we must not
  • stand thus: let us try to go back again.
  • HOPE. But, good brother, let me go before.
  • CHR. No, if you please, let me go first, that if there be any danger,
  • I may be first therein, because by my means we are both gone out
  • of the way.
  • {282} HOPE. No, said Hopeful, you shall not go first; for your
  • mind being troubled may lead you out of the way again. Then, for
  • their encouragement, they heard the voice of one saying, "Set thine
  • heart toward the highway, even the way which thou wentest; turn
  • again." [Jer. 31:21] But by this time the waters were greatly
  • risen, by reason of which the way of going back was very dangerous.
  • (Then I thought that it is easier going out of the way, when we
  • are in, than going in when we are out.) Yet they adventured to go
  • back, but it was so dark, and the flood was so high, that in their
  • going back they had like to have been drowned nine or ten times.
  • {283} Neither could they, with all the skill they had, get again to
  • the stile that night. Wherefore, at last, lighting under a little
  • shelter, they sat down there until the daybreak; but, being weary,
  • they fell asleep. Now there was, not far from the place where they
  • lay, a castle called Doubting Castle, the owner whereof was Giant
  • Despair; and it was in his grounds they now were sleeping: wherefore
  • he, getting up in the morning early, and walking up and down in his
  • fields, caught Christian and Hopeful asleep in his grounds. Then,
  • with a grim and surly voice, he bid them awake; and asked them
  • whence they were, and what they did in his grounds. They told him
  • they were pilgrims, and that they had lost their way. Then said
  • the Giant, You have this night trespassed on me, by trampling in
  • and lying on my grounds, and therefore you must go along with me.
  • So they were forced to go, because he was stronger than they. They
  • also had but little to say, for they knew themselves in a fault.
  • The Giant, therefore, drove them before him, and put them into his
  • castle, into a very dark dungeon, nasty and stinking to the spirits
  • of these two men. [Ps. 88:18] Here, then, they lay from Wednesday
  • morning till Saturday night, without one bit of bread, or drop of
  • drink, or light, or any to ask how they did; they were, therefore,
  • here in evil case, and were far from friends and acquaintance. Now
  • in this place Christian had double sorrow, because it was through
  • his unadvised counsel that they were brought into this distress.
  • The pilgrims now, to gratify the flesh,
  • Will seek its ease; but oh! how they afresh
  • Do thereby plunge themselves new griefs into!
  • Who seek to please the flesh, themselves undo.
  • {284} Now, Giant Despair had a wife, and her name was Diffidence.
  • So when he was gone to bed, he told his wife what he had done; to
  • wit, that he had taken a couple of prisoners and cast them into his
  • dungeon, for trespassing on his grounds. Then he asked her also
  • what he had best to do further to them. So she asked him what they
  • were, whence they came, and whither they were bound; and he told
  • her. Then she counselled him that when he arose in the morning he
  • should beat them without any mercy. So, when he arose, he getteth
  • him a grievous crab-tree cudgel, and goes down into the dungeon
  • to them, and there first falls to rating of them as if they were
  • dogs, although they never gave him a word of distaste. Then he
  • falls upon them, and beats them fearfully, in such sort that they
  • were not able to help themselves, or to turn them upon the floor.
  • This done, he withdraws and leaves them there to condole their
  • misery and to mourn under their distress. So all that day they
  • spent the time in nothing but sighs and bitter lamentations. The
  • next night, she, talking with her husband about them further, and
  • understanding they were yet alive, did advise him to counsel them
  • to make away themselves. So when morning was come, he goes to them
  • in a surly manner as before, and perceiving them to be very sore
  • with the stripes that he had given them the day before, he told
  • them, that since they were never like to come out of that place,
  • their only way would be forthwith to make an end of themselves,
  • either with knife, halter, or poison, for why, said he, should you
  • choose life, seeing it is attended with so much bitterness? But
  • they desired him to let them go. With that he looked ugly upon
  • them, and, rushing to them, had doubtless made an end of them
  • himself, but that he fell into one of his fits, (for he sometimes, in
  • sunshiny weather, fell into fits), and lost for a time the use of
  • his hand; wherefore he withdrew, and left them as before, to consider
  • what to do. Then did the prisoners consult between themselves
  • whether it was best to take his counsel or no; and thus they began
  • to discourse:--
  • {285} CHR. Brother, said Christian, what shall we do? The life that
  • we now live is miserable. For my part I know not whether is best,
  • to live thus, or to die out of hand. "My soul chooseth strangling
  • rather than life", and the grave is more easy for me than this
  • dungeon. [Job 7:15] Shall we be ruled by the Giant?
  • {286} HOPE. Indeed, our present condition is dreadful, and death
  • would be far more welcome to me than thus for ever to abide;
  • but yet, let us consider, the Lord of the country to which we are
  • going hath said, Thou shalt do no murder: no, not to another man's
  • person; much more, then, are we forbidden to take his counsel to
  • kill ourselves. Besides, he that kills another, can but commit
  • murder upon his body; but for one to kill himself is to kill body
  • and soul at once. And, moreover, my brother, thou talkest of ease
  • in the grave; but hast thou forgotten the hell, for certain the
  • murderers go? "For no murderer hath eternal life," &c. And let
  • us consider, again, that all the law is not in the hand of Giant
  • Despair. Others, so far as I can understand, have been taken
  • by him, as well as we; and yet have escaped out of his hand. Who
  • knows, but the God that made the world may cause that Giant Despair
  • may die? or that, at some time or other, he may forget to lock
  • us in? or that he may, in a short time, have another of his fits
  • before us, and may lose the use of his limbs? and if ever that
  • should come to pass again, for my part, I am resolved to pluck
  • up the heart of a man, and to try my utmost to get from under his
  • hand. I was a fool that I did not try to do it before; but, however,
  • my brother, let us be patient, and endure a while. The time may
  • come that may give us a happy release; but let us not be our own
  • murderers. With these words Hopeful at present did moderate the
  • mind of his brother; so they continued together (in the dark) that
  • day, in their sad and doleful condition.
  • {287} Well, towards evening, the Giant goes down into the dungeon
  • again, to see if his prisoners had taken his counsel; but when he
  • came there he found them alive; and truly, alive was all; for now,
  • what for want of bread and water, and by reason of the wounds they
  • received when he beat them, they could do little but breathe. But,
  • I say, he found them alive; at which he fell into a grievous rage,
  • and told them that, seeing they had disobeyed his counsel, it should
  • be worse with them than if they had never been born.
  • {288} At this they trembled greatly, and I think that Christian fell
  • into a swoon; but, coming a little to himself again, they renewed
  • their discourse about the Giant's counsel; and whether yet they
  • had best to take it or no. Now Christian again seemed to be for
  • doing it, but Hopeful made his second reply as followeth:--
  • {289} HOPE. My brother, said he, rememberest thou not how valiant
  • thou hast been heretofore? Apollyon could not crush thee, nor
  • could all that thou didst hear, or see, or feel, in the Valley of
  • the Shadow of Death. What hardship, terror, and amazement hast
  • thou already gone through! And art thou now nothing but fear!
  • Thou seest that I am in the dungeon with thee, a far weaker man by
  • nature than thou art; also, this Giant has wounded me as well as
  • thee, and hath also cut off the bread and water from my mouth; and
  • with thee I mourn without the light. But let us exercise a little
  • more patience; remember how thou playedst the man at Vanity Fair,
  • and wast neither afraid of the chain, nor cage, nor yet of bloody
  • death. Wherefore let us (at least to avoid the shame, that becomes
  • not a Christian to be found in) bear up with patience as well as
  • we can.
  • {290} Now, night being come again, and the Giant and his wife being
  • in bed, she asked him concerning the prisoners, and if they had
  • taken his counsel. To which he replied, They are sturdy rogues, they
  • choose rather to bear all hardship, than to make away themselves.
  • Then said she, Take them into the castle-yard to-morrow, and show
  • them the bones and skulls of those that thou hast already despatched,
  • and make them believe, ere a week comes to an end, thou also wilt
  • tear them in pieces, as thou hast done their fellows before them.
  • {291} So when the morning was come, the Giant goes to them again,
  • and takes them into the castle-yard, and shows them, as his wife
  • had bidden him. These, said he, were pilgrims as you are, once,
  • and they trespassed in my grounds, as you have done; and when I
  • thought fit, I tore them in pieces, and so, within ten days, I will
  • do you. Go, get you down to your den again; and with that he beat
  • them all the way thither. They lay, therefore, all day on Saturday
  • in a lamentable case, as before. Now, when night was come, and
  • when Mrs. Diffidence and her husband, the Giant, were got to bed,
  • they began to renew their discourse of their prisoners; and withal
  • the old Giant wondered, that he could neither by his blows nor
  • his counsel bring them to an end. And with that his wife replied,
  • I fear, said she, that they live in hope that some will come to
  • relieve them, or that they have picklocks about them, by the means
  • of which they hope to escape. And sayest thou so, my dear? said
  • the Giant; I will, therefore, search them in the morning.
  • {292} Well, on Saturday, about midnight, they began to pray, and
  • continued in prayer till almost break of day.
  • Now a little before it was day, good Christian, as one half amazed,
  • brake out in passionate speech: What a fool, quoth he, am I, thus
  • to lie in a stinking Dungeon, when I may as well walk at liberty.
  • I have a Key in my bosom called Promise, that will, I am persuaded,
  • open any Lock in Doubting Castle. Then said Hopeful, That's good
  • news; good Brother pluck it out of thy bosom and try.
  • A key in Christian's bosom, called Promise, opens any lock in
  • Doubting Castle
  • Then Christian pulled it out of his bosom, and began to try at the
  • Dungeon door, whose bolt (as he turned the Key) gave back, and the
  • door flew open with ease, and Christian and Hopeful both came out.
  • Then he went to the outward door that leads into the Castle-yard,
  • and with his Key opened that door also. After he went to the iron
  • Gate, for that must be opened too, but that Lock went damnable
  • hard, yet the Key did open it. Then they thrust open the Gate to
  • make their escape with speed; but that Gate as it opened made such
  • a creaking, that it waked Giant Despair, who hastily rising to
  • pursue his Prisoners, felt his limbs to fail, for his Fits took
  • him again, so that he could by no means go after them. Then they
  • went on, and came to the King's High-way again, and so were safe,
  • because they were out of his jurisdiction
  • {294} Now, when they were over the stile, they began to contrive
  • with themselves what they should do at that stile to prevent those
  • that should come after from falling into the hands of Giant Despair.
  • So they consented to erect there a pillar, and to engrave upon the
  • side thereof this sentence--"Over this stile is the way to Doubting
  • Castle, which is kept by Giant Despair, who despiseth the King of
  • the Celestial Country, and seeks to destroy his holy pilgrims."
  • Many, therefore, that followed after read what was written, and
  • escaped the danger. This done, they sang as follows:--
  • Out of the way we went, and then we found
  • What 'twas to tread upon forbidden ground;
  • And let them that come after have a care,
  • Lest heedlessness makes them, as we, to fare.
  • Lest they for trespassing his prisoners are,
  • Whose castle's Doubting, and whose name's Despair.
  • {295} They went then till they came to the Delectable Mountains,
  • which mountains belong to the Lord of that hill of which we have
  • spoken before; so they went up to the mountains, to behold the
  • gardens and orchards, the vineyards and fountains of water; where
  • also they drank and washed themselves, and did freely eat of the
  • vineyards. Now there were on the tops of these mountains Shepherds
  • feeding their flocks, and they stood by the highway side. The
  • Pilgrims therefore went to them, and leaning upon their staves, (as
  • is common with weary pilgrims when they stand to talk with any by
  • the way), they asked, Whose Delectable Mountains are these? And
  • whose be the sheep that feed upon them?
  • Mountains delectable they now ascend,
  • Where Shepherds be, which to them do commend
  • Alluring things, and things that cautious are,
  • Pilgrims are steady kept by faith and fear.
  • {296} SHEP. These mountains are Immanuel's Land, and they are
  • within sight of his city; and the sheep also are his, and he laid
  • down his life for them. [John 10:11]
  • CHR. Is this the way to the Celestial City?
  • SHEP. You are just in your way.
  • CHR. How far is it thither?
  • SHEP. Too far for any but those that shall get thither indeed.
  • CHR. Is the way safe or dangerous?
  • SHEP. Safe for those for whom it is to be safe; but the transgressors
  • shall fall therein. [Hos. 14:9]
  • CHR. Is there, in this place, any relief for pilgrims that are
  • weary and faint in the way?
  • SHEP. The Lord of these mountains hath given us a charge not to be
  • forgetful to entertain strangers, therefore the good of the place
  • is before you. [Heb. 13:1-2]
  • {297} I saw also in my dream, that when the Shepherds perceived
  • that they were wayfaring men, they also put questions to them, to
  • which they made answer as in other places; as, Whence came you?
  • and, How got you into the way? and, By what means have you so
  • persevered therein? For but few of them that begin to come hither
  • do show their face on these mountains. But when the Shepherds heard
  • their answers, being pleased therewith, they looked very lovingly
  • upon them, and said, Welcome to the Delectable Mountains.
  • {298} The Shepherds, I say, whose names were Knowledge, Experience,
  • Watchful, and Sincere, took them by the hand, and had them to their
  • tents, and made them partake of that which was ready at present.
  • They said, moreover, We would that ye should stay here awhile, to
  • be acquainted with us; and yet more to solace yourselves with the
  • good of these Delectable Mountains. They then told them, that
  • they were content to stay; so they went to their rest that night,
  • because it was very late.
  • {299} Then I saw in my dream, that in the morning the Shepherds called
  • up to Christian and Hopeful to walk with them upon the mountains;
  • so they went forth with them, and walked a while, having a pleasant
  • prospect on every side. Then said the Shepherds one to another,
  • Shall we show these pilgrims some wonders? So when they had concluded
  • to do it, they had them first to the top of a hill called Error,
  • which was very steep on the furthest side, and bid them look down
  • to the bottom. So Christian and Hopeful looked down, and saw at
  • the bottom several men dashed all to pieces by a fall that they
  • had from the top. Then said Christian, What meaneth this? The
  • Shepherds answered, Have you not heard of them that were made to
  • err by hearkening to Hymeneus and Philetus as concerning the faith
  • of the resurrection of the body? [2 Tim. 2:17,18] They answered,
  • Yes. Then said the Shepherds, Those that you see lie dashed
  • in pieces at the bottom of this mountain are they; and they have
  • continued to this day unburied, as you see, for an example to others
  • to take heed how they clamber too high, or how they come too near
  • the brink of this mountain.
  • {300} Then I saw that they had them to the top of another mountain,
  • and the name of that is Caution, and bid them look afar off; which,
  • when they did, they perceived, as they thought, several men walking
  • up and down among the tombs that were there; and they perceived
  • that the men were blind, because they stumbled sometimes upon the
  • tombs, and because they could not get out from among them. Then
  • said Christian, What means this?
  • {301} The Shepherds then answered, Did you not see a little below
  • these mountains a stile, that led into a meadow, on the left hand
  • of this way? They answered, Yes. Then said the Shepherds, From
  • that stile there goes a path that leads directly to Doubting Castle,
  • which is kept by Giant Despair, and these, pointing to them among
  • the tombs, came once on pilgrimage, as you do now, even till they
  • came to that same stile; and because the right way was rough in
  • that place, they chose to go out of it into that meadow, and there
  • were taken by Giant Despair, and cast into Doubting Castle; where,
  • after they had been a while kept in the dungeon, he at last did put
  • out their eyes, and led them among those tombs, where he has left
  • them to wander to this very day, that the saying of the wise man might
  • be fulfilled, "He that wandereth out of the way of understanding,
  • shall remain in the congregation of the dead." [Pro. 21:16] Then
  • Christian and Hopeful looked upon one another, with tears gushing
  • out, but yet said nothing to the Shepherds.
  • {302} Then I saw in my dream, that the Shepherds had them to another
  • place, in a bottom, where was a door in the side of a hill, and they
  • opened the door, and bid them look in. They looked in, therefore,
  • and saw that within it was very dark and smoky; they also thought
  • that they heard there a rumbling noise as of fire, and a cry of
  • some tormented, and that they smelt the scent of brimstone. Then
  • said Christian, What means this? The Shepherds told them, This is
  • a by-way to hell, a way that hypocrites go in at; namely, such as
  • sell their birthright, with Esau; such as sell their master, with
  • Judas; such as blaspheme the gospel, with Alexander; and that
  • lie and dissemble, with Ananias and Sapphira his wife. Then said
  • Hopeful to the Shepherds, I perceive that these had on them, even
  • every one, a show of pilgrimage, as we have now; had they not?
  • {303} SHEP. Yes, and held it a long time too.
  • HOPE. How far might they go on in pilgrimage in their day, since
  • they notwithstanding were thus miserably cast away?
  • SHEP. Some further, and some not so far, as these mountains.
  • Then said the Pilgrims one to another, We have need to cry to the
  • Strong for strength.
  • SHEP. Ay, and you will have need to use it, when you have it, too.
  • {304} By this time the Pilgrims had a desire to go forward, and
  • the Shepherds a desire they should; so they walked together towards
  • the end of the mountains. Then said the Shepherds one to another,
  • Let us here show to the Pilgrims the gates of the Celestial City,
  • if they have skill to look through our perspective glass. The
  • Pilgrims then lovingly accepted the motion; so they had them to
  • the top of a high hill, called Clear, and gave them their glass to
  • look.
  • {305} Then they essayed to look, but the remembrance of that last
  • thing that the Shepherds had shown them, made their hands shake;
  • by means of which impediment, they could not look steadily through
  • the glass; yet they thought they saw something like the gate, and
  • also some of the glory of the place. Then they went away, and sang
  • this song--
  • Thus, by the Shepherds, secrets are reveal'd,
  • Which from all other men are kept conceal'd.
  • Come to the Shepherds, then, if you would see
  • Things deep, things hid, and that mysterious be.
  • {306} When they were about to depart, one of the Shepherds gave
  • them a note of the way. Another of them bid them beware of the
  • Flatterer. The third bid them take heed that they sleep not upon
  • the Enchanted Ground. And the fourth bid them God-speed. So I
  • awoke from my dream.
  • {307} And I slept, and dreamed again, and saw the same two Pilgrims
  • going down the mountains along the highway towards the city. Now,
  • a little below these mountains, on the left hand, lieth the country
  • of Conceit; from which country there comes into the way in which
  • the Pilgrims walked, a little crooked lane. Here, therefore, they
  • met with a very brisk lad, that came out of that country; and his
  • name was Ignorance. So Christian asked him from what parts he
  • came, and whither he was going.
  • {308} IGNOR. Sir, I was born in the country that lieth off there
  • a little on the left hand, and I am going to the Celestial City.
  • CHR. But how do you think to get in at the gate? for you may find
  • some difficulty there.
  • IGNOR. As other people do, said he.
  • CHR. But what have you to show at that gate, that may cause that
  • the gate should be opened to you?
  • IGNOR. I know my Lord's will, and I have been a good liver; I pay
  • every man his own; I pray, fast, pay tithes, and give alms, and
  • have left my country for whither I am going.
  • {309} CHR. But thou camest not in at the wicket-gate that is at the
  • head of this way; thou camest in hither through that same crooked
  • lane, and therefore, I fear, however thou mayest think of thyself,
  • when the reckoning day shall come, thou wilt have laid to thy charge
  • that thou art a thief and a robber, instead of getting admittance
  • into the city.
  • IGNOR. Gentlemen, ye be utter strangers to me, I know you not; be
  • content and follow the religion of your country, and I will follow
  • the religion of mine. I hope all will be well. And as for the
  • gate that you talk of, all the world knows that that is a great way
  • off of our country. I cannot think that any man in all our parts
  • doth so much as know the way to it, nor need they matter whether
  • they do or no, since we have, as you see, a fine, pleasant green
  • lane, that comes down from our country, the next way into the way.
  • {310} When Christian saw that the man was "wise in his own conceit",
  • he said to Hopeful, whisperingly, "There is more hope of a fool
  • than of him." [Prov. 26:12] And said, moreover, "When he that is
  • a fool walketh by the way, his wisdom faileth him, and he saith to
  • every one that he is a fool." [Eccl. 10:3] What, shall we talk
  • further with him, or out-go him at present, and so leave him to
  • think of what he hath heard already, and then stop again for him
  • afterwards, and see if by degrees we can do any good to him? Then
  • said Hopeful--
  • Let Ignorance a little while now muse
  • On what is said, and let him not refuse
  • Good counsel to embrace, lest he remain
  • Still ignorant of what's the chiefest gain.
  • God saith, those that no understanding have,
  • Although he made them, them he will not save.
  • HOPE. He further added, It is not good, I think, to say all to him
  • at once; let us pass him by, if you will, and talk to him anon,
  • even as he is able to bear it.
  • {311} So they both went on, and Ignorance he came after. Now when
  • they had passed him a little way, they entered into a very dark
  • lane, where they met a man whom seven devils had bound with seven
  • strong cords, and were carrying of him back to the door that they
  • saw on the side of the hill. [Matt. 12:45, Prov. 5:22] Now good
  • Christian began to tremble, and so did Hopeful his companion; yet
  • as the devils led away the man, Christian looked to see if he knew
  • him; and he thought it might be one Turn-away, that dwelt in the
  • town of Apostasy. But he did not perfectly see his face, for he
  • did hang his head like a thief that is found. But being once past,
  • Hopeful looked after him, and espied on his back a paper with this
  • inscription, "Wanton professor and damnable apostate".
  • Then said Christian to his fellow, Now I call to remembrance, that
  • which was told me of a thing that happened to a good man hereabout.
  • The name of the man was Little-faith, but a good man, and he dwelt
  • in the town of Sincere. The thing was this:--At the entering
  • in at this passage, there comes down from Broad-way Gate, a lane
  • called Dead Man's Lane; so called because of the murders that are
  • commonly done there; and this Little-faith going on pilgrimage,
  • as we do now, chanced to sit down there, and slept. Now there
  • happened, at that time, to come down the lane, from Broad-way Gate,
  • three sturdy rogues, and their names were Faint-heart, Mistrust,
  • and Guilt, (three brothers), and they espying Little-faith, where
  • he was, came galloping up with speed. Now the good man was just
  • awake from his sleep, and was getting up to go on his journey.
  • So they came up all to him, and with threatening language bid him
  • stand. At this Little-faith looked as white as a clout, and had
  • neither power to fight nor fly. Then said Faint-heart, Deliver thy
  • purse. But he making no haste to do it (for he was loath to lose
  • his money), Mistrust ran up to him, and thrusting his hand into
  • his pocket, pulled out thence a bag of silver. Then he cried out,
  • Thieves! Thieves! With that Guilt, with a great club that was
  • in his hand, struck Little-faith on the head, and with that blow
  • felled him flat to the ground, where he lay bleeding as one that
  • would bleed to death. All this while the thieves stood by. But,
  • at last, they hearing that some were upon the road, and fearing
  • lest it should be one Great-grace, that dwells in the city of
  • Good-confidence, they betook themselves to their heels, and left
  • this good man to shift for himself. Now, after a while, Little-faith
  • came to himself, and getting up, made shift to scrabble on his way.
  • This was the story.
  • {312} HOPE. But did they take from him all that ever he had?
  • Chr. No; the place where his jewels were they never ransacked, so
  • those he kept still. But, as I was told, the good man was much afflicted
  • for his loss, for the thieves got most of his spending-money. That
  • which they got not (as I said) were jewels, also he had a little
  • odd money left, but scarce enough to bring him to his journey's
  • end [1 Peter 4:18]; nay, if I was not misinformed, he was forced
  • to beg as he went, to keep himself alive; for his jewels he might
  • not sell. But beg, and do what he could, he went (as we say) with
  • many a hungry belly the most part of the rest of the way.
  • {313} HOPE. But is it not a wonder they got not from him his certificate,
  • by which he was to receive his admittance at the Celestial Gate?
  • CHR. It is a wonder; but they got not that, though they missed it
  • not through any good cunning of his; for he, being dismayed with
  • their coming upon him, had neither power nor skill to hide anything;
  • so it was more by good Providence than by his endeavour, that they
  • missed of that good thing.
  • {314} HOPE. But it must needs be a comfort to him, that they got
  • not his jewels from him.
  • CHR. It might have been great comfort to him, had he used it as
  • he should; but they that told me the story said, that he made but
  • little use of it all the rest of the way, and that because of the
  • dismay that he had in the taking away his money; indeed, he forgot
  • it a great part of the rest of his journey; and besides, when at any
  • time it came into his mind, and he began to be comforted therewith,
  • then would fresh thoughts of his loss come again upon him, and
  • those thoughts would swallow up all. [1 Peter 1:9]
  • {315} HOPE. Alas! poor man! This could not but be a great grief
  • to him.
  • CHR. Grief! ay, a grief indeed. Would it not have been so to any
  • of us, had we been used as he, to be robbed, and wounded too, and
  • that in a strange place, as he was? It is a wonder he did not die
  • with grief, poor heart! I was told that he scattered almost all
  • the rest of the way with nothing but doleful and bitter complaints;
  • telling also to all that overtook him, or that he overtook in the
  • way as he went, where he was robbed, and how; who they were that
  • did it, and what he lost; how he was wounded, and that he hardly
  • escaped with his life.
  • {316} HOPE. But it is a wonder that his necessity did not put him
  • upon selling or pawning some of his jewels, that he might have
  • wherewith to relieve himself in his journey.
  • CHR. Thou talkest like one upon whose head is the shell to this
  • very day; for what should he pawn them, or to whom should he sell
  • them? In all that country where he was robbed, his jewels were not
  • accounted of; nor did he want that relief which could from thence
  • be administered to him. Besides, had his jewels been missing at the
  • gate of the Celestial City, he had (and that he knew well enough)
  • been excluded from an inheritance there; and that would have been
  • worse to him than the appearance and villainy of ten thousand
  • thieves.
  • {317} HOPE. Why art thou so tart, my brother? Esau sold his
  • birthright, and that for a mess of pottage, and that birthright
  • was his greatest jewel; and if he, why might not Little-faith do
  • so too? [Heb. 12:16]
  • CHR. Esau did sell his birthright indeed, and so do many besides,
  • and by so doing exclude themselves from the chief blessing, as
  • also that caitiff did; but you must put a difference betwixt Esau
  • and Little-faith, and also betwixt their estates. Esau's birthright
  • was typical, but Little-faith's jewels were not so; Esau's belly
  • was his god, but Little-faith's belly was not so; Esau's want lay
  • in his fleshly appetite, Little-faith's did not so. Besides, Esau
  • could see no further than to the fulfilling of his lusts; "Behold,
  • I am at the point to die, (said he), and what profit shall this
  • birthright do me?" [Gen. 25:32] But Little-faith, though it was
  • his lot to have but a little faith, was by his little faith kept
  • from such extravagances, and made to see and prize his jewels
  • more than to sell them, as Esau did his birthright. You read not
  • anywhere that Esau had faith, no, not so much as a little; therefore,
  • no marvel if, where the flesh only bears sway, (as it will in that
  • man where no faith is to resist), if he sells his birthright, and
  • his soul and all, and that to the devil of hell; for it is with
  • such, as it is with the ass, who in her occasions cannot be turned
  • away. [Jer. 2:24] When their minds are set upon their lusts,
  • they will have them whatever they cost. But Little-faith was of
  • another temper, his mind was on things divine; his livelihood was
  • upon things that were spiritual, and from above; therefore, to what
  • end should he that is of such a temper sell his jewels (had there
  • been any that would have bought them) to fill his mind with empty
  • things? Will a man give a penny to fill his belly with hay; or can
  • you persuade the turtle-dove to live upon carrion like the crow?
  • Though faithless ones can, for carnal lusts, pawn, or mortgage,
  • or sell what they have, and themselves outright to boot; yet they
  • that have faith, saving faith, though but a little of it, cannot
  • do so. Here, therefore, my brother, is thy mistake.
  • {318} HOPE. I acknowledge it; but yet your severe reflection had
  • almost made me angry.
  • CHR. Why, I did but compare thee to some of the birds that are of
  • the brisker sort, who will run to and fro in untrodden paths, with
  • the shell upon their heads; but pass by that, and consider the
  • matter under debate, and all shall be well betwixt thee and me.
  • HOPE. But, Christian, these three fellows, I am persuaded in
  • my heart, are but a company of cowards; would they have run else,
  • think you, as they did, at the noise of one that was coming on
  • the road? Why did not Little-faith pluck up a greater heart? He
  • might, methinks, have stood one brush with them, and have yielded
  • when there had been no remedy.
  • CHR. That they are cowards, many have said, but few have found it
  • so in the time of trial. As for a great heart, Little-faith had
  • none; and I perceive by thee, my brother, hadst thou been the man
  • concerned, thou art but for a brush, and then to yield.
  • And, verily, since this is the height of thy stomach, now they are
  • at a distance from us, should they appear to thee as they did to
  • him they might put thee to second thoughts.
  • {319} But, consider again, they are but journeymen thieves, they
  • serve under the king of the bottomless pit, who, if need be, will
  • come into their aid himself, and his voice is as the roaring of a
  • lion. [1 Pet. 5:8] I myself have been engaged as this Little-faith
  • was, and I found it a terrible thing. These three villains set
  • upon me, and I beginning, like a Christian, to resist, they gave
  • but a call, and in came their master. I would, as the saying is,
  • have given my life for a penny, but that, as God would have it,
  • I was clothed with armour of proof. Ay, and yet, though I was so
  • harnessed, I found it hard work to quit myself like a man. No man
  • can tell what in that combat attends us, but he that hath been in
  • the battle himself.
  • {320} HOPE. Well, but they ran, you see, when they did but suppose
  • that one Great-grace was in the way.
  • CHR. True, they have often fled, both they and their master, when
  • Great-grace hath but appeared; and no marvel; for he is the King's
  • champion. But, I trow, you will put some difference betwixt
  • Little-faith and the King's champion. All the King's subjects
  • are not his champions, nor can they, when tried, do such feats of
  • war as he. Is it meet to think that a little child should handle
  • Goliath as David did? Or that there should be the strength of
  • an ox in a wren? Some are strong, some are weak; some have great
  • faith, some have little. This man was one of the weak, and therefore
  • he went to the wall.
  • {321} HOPE. I would it had been Great-grace for their sakes.
  • CHR. If it had been, he might have had his hands full; for I must
  • tell you, that though Great-grace is excellent good at his weapons,
  • and has, and can, so long as he keeps them at sword's point, do well
  • enough with them; yet, if they get within him, even Faint-heart,
  • Mistrust, or the other, it shall go hard but they will throw up
  • his heels. And when a man is down, you know, what can he do?
  • {322} Whoso looks well upon Great-grace's face, shall see those
  • scars and cuts there, that shall easily give demonstration of what
  • I say. Yea, once I heard that he should say, (and that when he was
  • in the combat), "We despaired even of life." How did these sturdy
  • rogues and their fellows make David groan, mourn, and roar? Yea,
  • Heman, and Hezekiah, too, though champions in their day, were forced
  • to bestir them, when by these assaulted; and yet, notwithstanding,
  • they had their coats soundly brushed by them. Peter, upon a time,
  • would go try what he could do; but though some do say of him that
  • he is the prince of the apostles, they handled him so, that they
  • made him at last afraid of a sorry girl.
  • {323} Leviathan's sturdiness
  • Besides, their king is at their whistle. He is never out of hearing;
  • and if at any time they be put to the worst, he, if possible, comes in
  • to help them; and of him it is said, The sword of him that layeth
  • at him cannot hold the spear, the dart, nor the habergeon; he
  • esteemeth iron as straw, and brass as rotten wood. The arrow cannot
  • make him flee; sling stones are turned with him into stubble. Darts
  • are counted as stubble: he laugheth at the shaking of a spear.
  • [Job 41:26-29] What can a man do in this case? It is true, if a man
  • could, at every turn, have Job's horse, and had skill and courage
  • to ride him, he might do notable things; for his neck is clothed
  • with thunder, he will not be afraid of the grasshopper; the glory
  • of his nostrils is terrible: he paweth in the valley, and rejoiceth
  • in his strength, he goeth on to meet the armed men. He mocketh
  • at fear, and is not affrighted, neither turneth he back from the
  • sword. The quiver rattleth against him, the glittering spear, and
  • the shield. He swalloweth the ground with fierceness and rage,
  • neither believeth he that it is the sound of the trumpet. He saith
  • among the trumpets, Ha, ha! and he smelleth the battle afar off,
  • the thunder of the captains, and the shouting. [Job 39:19-25]
  • {324} But for such footmen as thee and I are, let us never desire
  • to meet with an enemy, nor vaunt as if we could do better, when we
  • hear of others that they have been foiled, Nor be tickled at the
  • thoughts of our own manhood; for such commonly come by the worst
  • when tried. Witness Peter, of whom I made mention before. He would
  • swagger, ay, he would; he would, as his vain mind prompted him to
  • say, do better, and stand more for his Master than all men; but
  • who so foiled, and run down by these villains, as he?
  • When, therefore, we hear that such robberies are done on the King's
  • highway, two things become us to do:
  • {325} 1. To go out harnessed, and to be sure to take a shield with
  • us; for it was for want of that, that he that laid so lustily at
  • Leviathan could not make him yield; for, indeed, if that be wanting,
  • he fears us not at all. Therefore, he that had skill hath said,
  • "Above all, taking the shield of faith, wherewith ye shall be able
  • to quench all the fiery darts of the wicked." [Eph. 6:16]
  • {326} 2. It is good, also, that we desire of the King a convoy,
  • yea, that he will go with us himself. This made David rejoice
  • when in the Valley of the Shadow of Death; and Moses was rather for
  • dying where he stood, than to go one step without his God. [Exo.
  • 33:15] Oh, my brother, if he will but go along with us, what need
  • we be afraid of ten thousands that shall set themselves against
  • us? [Ps. 3:5-8, 27:1-3] But, without him, the proud helpers "fall
  • under the slain". [Isa. 10:4]
  • {327} I, for my part, have been in the fray before now; and though,
  • through the goodness of him that is best, I am, as you see, alive,
  • yet I cannot boast of my manhood. Glad shall I be, if I meet
  • with no more such brunts; though I fear we are not got beyond all
  • danger. However, since the lion and the bear have not as yet devoured
  • me, I hope God will also deliver us from the next uncircumcised
  • Philistine. Then sang Christian--
  • Poor Little-faith! Hast been among the thieves?
  • Wast robb'd? Remember this, whoso believes,
  • And gets more faith, shall then a victor be
  • Over ten thousand, else scarce over three.
  • {328} So they went on and Ignorance followed. They went then till
  • they came at a place where they saw a way put itself into their way,
  • and seemed withal to lie as straight as the way which they should
  • go: and here they knew not which of the two to take, for both
  • seemed straight before them; therefore, here they stood still to
  • consider. And as they were thinking about the way, behold a man,
  • black of flesh, but covered with a very light robe, came to them,
  • and asked them why they stood there. They answered they were going
  • to the Celestial City, but knew not which of these ways to take.
  • Follow me, said the man, it is thither that I am going. So they
  • followed him in the way that but now came into the road, which by
  • degrees turned, and turned them so from the city that they desired
  • to go to, that, in little time, their faces were turned away from
  • it; yet they followed him. But by and by, before they were aware,
  • he led them both within the compass of a net, in which they were
  • both so entangled that they knew not what to do; and with that the
  • white robe fell off the black man's back. Then they saw where they
  • were. Wherefore, there they lay crying some time, for they could
  • not get themselves out.
  • {329} CHR. Then said Christian to his fellow, Now do I see myself
  • in error. Did not the Shepherds bid us beware of the flatterers?
  • As is the saying of the wise man, so we have found it this day. A
  • man that flattereth his neighbour, spreadeth a net for his feet.
  • [Prov. 29:5]
  • HOPE. They also gave us a note of directions about the way, for
  • our more sure finding thereof; but therein we have also forgotten
  • to read, and have not kept ourselves from the paths of the destroyer.
  • Here David was wiser than we; for, saith he, "Concerning the works
  • of men, by the word of thy lips, I have kept me from the paths of
  • the destroyer." [Ps. 17:4] Thus they lay bewailing themselves
  • in the net. At last they espied a Shining One coming towards them
  • with a whip of small cord in his hand. When he was come to the
  • place where they were, he asked them whence they came, and what
  • they did there. They told him that they were poor pilgrims going
  • to Zion, but were led out of their way by a black man, clothed in
  • white, who bid us, said they, follow him, for he was going thither
  • too. Then said he with the whip, It is Flatterer, a false apostle,
  • that hath transformed himself into an angel of light. [Prov. 29:5,
  • Dan. 11:32, 2 Cor. 11:13,14] So he rent the net, and let the men
  • out. Then said he to them, Follow me, that I may set you in your
  • way again. So he led them back to the way which they had left to
  • follow the Flatterer. Then he asked them, saying, Where did you lie
  • the last night? They said, With the Shepherds upon the Delectable
  • Mountains. He asked them then if they had not of those Shepherds
  • a note of direction for the way. They answered, Yes. But did you,
  • said he, when you were at a stand, pluck out and read your note?
  • They answered, No. He asked them, Why? They said, they forgot.
  • He asked, moreover, if the Shepherds did not bid them beware of
  • the Flatterer? They answered, Yes, but we did not imagine, said
  • they, that this fine-spoken man had been he. [Rom. 16:18]
  • {330} Then I saw in my dream that he commanded them to lie down;
  • which, when they did, he chastised them sore, to teach them the
  • good way wherein they should walk [Deut. 25:2]; and as he chastised
  • them he said, "As many as I love, I rebuke and chasten; be zealous,
  • therefore, and repent." [2 Chron. 6:26,27, Rev. 3:19] This
  • done, he bid them go on their way, and take good heed to the other
  • directions of the shepherds. So they thanked him for all his
  • kindness, and went softly along the right way, singing--
  • Come hither, you that walk along the way;
  • See how the pilgrims fare that go astray.
  • They catched are in an entangling net,
  • 'Cause they good counsel lightly did forget:
  • 'Tis true they rescued were, but yet you see,
  • They're scourged to boot. Let this your caution be.
  • {331} Now, after a while, they perceived, afar off, one coming
  • softly and alone, all along the highway to meet them. Then said
  • Christian to his fellow, Yonder is a man with his back towards
  • Zion, and he is coming to meet us.
  • HOPE. I see him; let us take heed to ourselves now, lest he should
  • prove a flatterer also. So he drew nearer and nearer, and at last
  • came up unto them. His name was Atheist, and he asked them whither
  • they were going.
  • CHR. We are going to Mount Zion.
  • Then Atheist fell into a very great laughter.
  • CHR. What is the meaning of your laughter?
  • {332} ATHEIST. I laugh to see what ignorant persons you are, to
  • take upon you so tedious a journey, and you are like to have nothing
  • but your travel for your pains.
  • CHR. Why, man, do you think we shall not be received?
  • ATHEIST. Received! There is no such place as you dream of in all
  • this world.
  • CHR. But there is in the world to come.
  • {333} ATHEIST. When I was at home in mine own country, I heard as
  • you now affirm, and from that hearing went out to see, and have
  • been seeking this city this twenty years; but find no more of it
  • than I did the first day I set out. [Jer. 22:12, Eccl. 10:15]
  • CHR. We have both heard and believe that there is such a place to
  • be found.
  • ATHEIST. Had not I, when at home, believed, I had not come thus far
  • to seek; but finding none, (and yet I should, had there been such
  • a place to be found, for I have gone to seek it further than you),
  • I am going back again, and will seek to refresh myself with the
  • things that I then cast away, for hopes of that which, I now see,
  • is not.
  • {334} CHR. Then said Christian to Hopeful his fellow, Is it true
  • which this man hath said?
  • Hopeful's gracious answer
  • Hope. Take heed, he is one of the flatterers; remember what it hath
  • cost us once already for our hearkening to such kind of fellows.
  • What! no Mount Zion? Did we not see, from the Delectable Mountains
  • the gate of the city? Also, are we not now to walk by faith? Let
  • us go on, said Hopeful, lest the man with the whip overtake us
  • again. [2 Cor. 5:7] You should have taught me that lesson, which
  • I will round you in the ears withal: "Cease, my son, to hear
  • the instruction that causeth to err from the words of knowledge."
  • [Prov. 19:27] I say, my brother, cease to hear him, and let us
  • "believe to the saving of the soul". [Heb. 10:39]
  • {335} CHR. My brother, I did not put the question to thee for that
  • I doubted of the truth of our belief myself, but to prove thee,
  • and to fetch from thee a fruit of the honesty of thy heart. As
  • for this man, I know that he is blinded by the god of this world.
  • Let thee and I go on, knowing that we have belief of the truth,
  • "and no lie is of the truth". [1 John 2:21]
  • HOPE. Now do I rejoice in hope of the glory of God. So they turned
  • away from the man; and he, laughing at them, went his way.
  • {336} I saw then in my dream, that they went till they came into
  • a certain country, whose air naturally tended to make one drowsy,
  • if he came a stranger into it. And here Hopeful began to be very
  • dull and heavy of sleep; wherefore he said unto Christian, I do
  • now begin to grow so drowsy that I can scarcely hold up mine eyes,
  • let us lie down here and take one nap.
  • CHR. By no means, said the other, lest sleeping, we never awake
  • more.
  • HOPE. Why, my brother? Sleep is sweet to the labouring man; we
  • may be refreshed if we take a nap.
  • CHR. Do you not remember that one of the Shepherds bid us beware
  • of the Enchanted Ground? He meant by that that we should beware
  • of sleeping; "Therefore let us not sleep, as do others, but let us
  • watch and be sober." [1 Thess. 5:6]
  • {337} HOPE. I acknowledge myself in a fault, and had I been here
  • alone I had by sleeping run the danger of death. I see it is true
  • that the wise man saith, Two are better than one. Hitherto hath
  • thy company been my mercy, and thou shalt have a good reward for
  • thy labour. [Eccl. 9:9]
  • CHR. Now then, said Christian, to prevent drowsiness in this place,
  • let us fall into good discourse.
  • HOPE. With all my heart, said the other.
  • CHR. Where shall we begin?
  • HOPE. Where God began with us. But do you begin, if you please.
  • CHR. I will sing you first this song:--
  • When saints do sleepy grow, let them come hither,
  • And hear how these two pilgrims talk together:
  • Yea, let them learn of them, in any wise,
  • Thus to keep ope their drowsy slumb'ring eyes.
  • Saints' fellowship, if it be managed well,
  • Keeps them awake, and that in spite of hell.
  • {338} CHR. Then Christian began and said, I will ask you a question.
  • How came you to think at first of so doing as you do now?
  • HOPE. Do you mean, how came I at first to look after the good of
  • my soul?
  • CHR. Yes, that is my meaning.
  • HOPE. I continued a great while in the delight of those things
  • which were seen and sold at our fair; things which, I believe now,
  • would have, had I continued in them, still drowned me in perdition
  • and destruction.
  • CHR. What things are they?
  • Hopeful's life before conversion
  • HOPE. All the treasures and riches of the world. Also, I delighted
  • much in rioting, revelling, drinking, swearing, lying, uncleanness,
  • Sabbath-breaking, and what not, that tended to destroy the soul.
  • But I found at last, by hearing and considering of things that are
  • divine, which indeed I heard of you, as also of beloved Faithful
  • that was put to death for his faith and good living in Vanity Fair,
  • that "the end of these things is death". [Rom. 6:21-23] And that
  • for these things' sake "cometh the wrath of God upon the children
  • of disobedience". [Eph. 5:6]
  • CHR. And did you presently fall under the power of this conviction?
  • {339} HOPE. No, I was not willing presently to know the evil
  • of sin, nor the damnation that follows upon the commission of it;
  • but endeavoured, when my mind at first began to be shaken with the
  • Word, to shut mine eyes against the light thereof.
  • CHR. But what was the cause of your carrying of it thus to the
  • first workings of God's blessed Spirit upon you?
  • {340} HOPE. The causes were, 1. I was ignorant that this was the
  • work of God upon me. I never thought that, by awakenings for sin,
  • God at first begins the conversion of a sinner. 2. Sin was yet
  • very sweet to my flesh, and I was loath to leave it. 3. I could
  • not tell how to part with mine old companions, their presence and
  • actions were so desirable unto me. 4. The hours in which convictions
  • were upon me were such troublesome and such heart-affrighting hours
  • that I could not bear, no not so much as the remembrance of them,
  • upon my heart.
  • CHR. Then, as it seems, sometimes you got rid of your trouble.
  • HOPE. Yes, verily, but it would come into my mind again, and then
  • I should be as bad, nay, worse, than I was before.
  • CHR. Why, what was it that brought your sins to mind again?
  • {341} HOPE. Many things; as,
  • 1. If I did but meet a good man in the streets; or,
  • 2. If I have heard any read in the Bible; or,
  • 3. If mine head did begin to ache; or,
  • 4. If I were told that some of my neighbours were sick; or,
  • 5. If I heard the bell toll for some that were dead; or,
  • 6. If I thought of dying myself; or,
  • 7. If I heard that sudden death happened to others;
  • 8. But especially, when I thought of myself, that I must quickly
  • come to judgment.
  • {342} CHR. And could you at any time, with ease, get off the guilt
  • of sin, when by any of these ways it came upon you?
  • HOPE. No, not I, for then they got faster hold of my conscience;
  • and then, if I did but think of going back to sin, (though my mind
  • was turned against it), it would be double torment to me.
  • CHR. And how did you do then?
  • HOPE. I thought I must endeavour to mend my life; for else, thought
  • I, I am sure to be damned.
  • {343} CHR. And did you endeavour to mend?
  • HOPE. Yes; and fled from not only my sins, but sinful company too;
  • and betook me to religious duties, as prayer, reading, weeping for
  • sin, speaking truth to my neighbours, &c. These things did I, with
  • many others, too much here to relate.
  • CHR. And did you think yourself well then?
  • HOPE. Yes, for a while; but at the last, my trouble came tumbling
  • upon me again, and that over the neck of all my reformations.
  • {344} CHR. How came that about, since you were now reformed?
  • HOPE. There were several things brought it upon me, especially such
  • sayings as these: "All our righteousnesses are as filthy rags."
  • [Isa. 64:6] "By the works of the law shall no flesh be justified."
  • [Gal. 2:16] "When ye shall have done all those things, say, We are
  • unprofitable", [Luke 17:10] with many more such like. From whence
  • I began to reason with myself thus: If ALL my righteousnesses are
  • filthy rags; if, by the deeds of the law, NO man can be justified;
  • and if, when we have done ALL, we are yet unprofitable, then it
  • is but a folly to think of heaven by the law. I further thought
  • thus: If a man runs a hundred pounds into the shopkeeper's debt,
  • and after that shall pay for all that he shall fetch; yet, if this
  • old debt stands still in the book uncrossed, for that the shopkeeper
  • may sue him, and cast him into prison till he shall pay the debt.
  • CHR. Well, and how did you apply this to yourself?
  • HOPE. Why; I thought thus with myself. I have, by my sins, run a
  • great way into God's book, and that my now reforming will not pay
  • off that score; therefore I should think still, under all my present
  • amendments, But how shall I be freed from that damnation that I
  • have brought myself in danger of by my former transgressions?
  • {345} CHR. A very good application: but, pray, go on.
  • HOPE. Another thing that hath troubled me, even since my late
  • amendments, is, that if I look narrowly into the best of what I do
  • now, I still see sin, new sin, mixing itself with the best of that
  • I do; so that now I am forced to conclude, that notwithstanding
  • my former fond conceits of myself and duties, I have committed sin
  • enough in one duty to send me to hell, though my former life had
  • been faultless.
  • CHR. And what did you do then?
  • {346} HOPE. Do! I could not tell what to do, until I brake my
  • mind to Faithful, for he and I were well acquainted. And he told
  • me, that unless I could obtain the righteousness of a man that
  • never had sinned, neither mine own, nor all the righteousness of
  • the world could save me.
  • CHR. And did you think he spake true?
  • HOPE. Had he told me so when I was pleased and satisfied with mine
  • own amendment, I had called him fool for his pains; but now, since
  • I see mine own infirmity, and the sin that cleaves to my best
  • performance, I have been forced to be of his opinion.
  • {347} CHR. But did you think, when at first he suggested it to you,
  • that there was such a man to be found, of whom it might justly be
  • said that he never committed sin?
  • HOPE. I must confess the words at first sounded strangely, but
  • after a little more talk and company with him, I had full conviction
  • about it.
  • CHR. And did you ask him what man this was, and how you must be
  • justified by him?
  • HOPE. Yes, and he told me it was the Lord Jesus, that dwelleth on
  • the right hand of the Most High. And thus, said he, you must be
  • justified by him, even by trusting to what he hath done by himself,
  • in the days of his flesh, and suffered when he did hang on the
  • tree. I asked him further, how that man's righteousness could be
  • of that efficacy to justify another before God? And he told me he
  • was the mighty God, and did what he did, and died the death also,
  • not for himself, but for me; to whom his doings, and the worthiness
  • of them, should be imputed, if I believed on him. [Heb. 10,
  • Rom. 6, Col. 1, 1 Pet. 1]
  • {348} CHR. And what did you do then?
  • HOPE. I made my objections against my believing, for that I thought
  • he was not willing to save me.
  • CHR. And what said Faithful to you then?
  • HOPE. He bid me go to him and see. Then I said it was presumption;
  • but he said, No, for I was invited to come. [Matt. 11:28] Then
  • he gave me a book of Jesus, his inditing, to encourage me the more
  • freely to come; and he said, concerning that book, that every jot
  • and tittle thereof stood firmer than heaven and earth. [Matt.
  • 24:35] Then I asked him, What I must do when I came; and he told
  • me, I must entreat upon my knees, with all my heart and soul, the
  • Father to reveal him to me. [Ps. 95:6, Dan. 6:10, Jer. 29:12,13]
  • Then I asked him further, how I must make my supplication to him?
  • And he said, Go, and thou shalt find him upon a mercy-seat, where
  • he sits all the year long, to give pardon and forgiveness to them
  • that come. I told him that I knew not what to say when I came.
  • And he bid me say to this effect: God be merciful to me a sinner,
  • and make me to know and believe in Jesus Christ; for I see, that
  • if his righteousness had not been, or I have not faith in that
  • righteousness, I am utterly cast away. Lord, I have heard that thou
  • art a merciful God, and hast ordained that thy Son Jesus Christ
  • should be the Saviour of the world; and moreover, that thou art
  • willing to bestow him upon such a poor sinner as I am, (and I am a
  • sinner indeed); Lord, take therefore this opportunity and magnify
  • thy grace in the salvation of my soul, through thy Son Jesus Christ.
  • Amen. [Exo. 25:22, Lev. 16:2, Num. 7:89, Heb. 4:16]
  • {349} CHR. And did you do as you were bidden?
  • HOPE. Yes; over, and over, and over.
  • CHR. And did the Father reveal his Son to you?
  • HOPE. Not at the first, nor second, nor third, nor fourth, nor
  • fifth; no, nor at the sixth time neither.
  • CHR. What did you do then?
  • HOPE. What! why I could not tell what to do.
  • CHR. Had you not thoughts of leaving off praying?
  • HOPE. Yes; an hundred times twice told.
  • CHR. And what was the reason you did not?
  • HOPE. I believed that that was true which had been told me, to
  • wit, that without the righteousness of this Christ, all the world
  • could not save me; and therefore, thought I with myself, if I leave
  • off I die, and I can but die at the throne of grace. And withal,
  • this came into my mind, "Though it tarry, wait for it; because it
  • will surely come, it will not tarry." [Heb. 2:3] So I continued
  • praying until the Father showed me his Son.
  • {350} CHR. And how was he revealed unto you?
  • HOPE. I did not see him with my bodily eyes, but with the eyes of
  • my understanding; [Eph. 1:18,19] and thus it was: One day I was
  • very sad, I think sadder than at any one time in my life, and this
  • sadness was through a fresh sight of the greatness and vileness of
  • my sins. And as I was then looking for nothing but hell, and the
  • everlasting damnation of my soul, suddenly, as I thought, I saw
  • the Lord Jesus Christ look down from heaven upon me, and saying,
  • "Believe on the Lord Jesus Christ, and thou shalt be saved." [Acts
  • 16:30,31]
  • {351} But I replied, Lord, I am a great, a very great sinner. And
  • he answered, "My grace is sufficient for thee." [2 Cor.12:9] Then
  • I said, But, Lord, what is believing? And then I saw from that
  • saying, "He that cometh to me shall never hunger, and he that
  • believeth on me shall never thirst", that believing and coming was
  • all one; and that he that came, that is, ran out in his heart and
  • affections after salvation by Christ, he indeed believed in Christ.
  • [John 6:35] Then the water stood in mine eyes, and I asked further.
  • But, Lord, may such a great sinner as I am be indeed accepted of
  • thee, and be saved by thee? And I heard him say, "And him that
  • cometh to me, I will in no wise cast out." [John 6:37] Then I said,
  • But how, Lord, must I consider of thee in my coming to thee, that
  • my faith may be placed aright upon thee? Then he said, "Christ
  • Jesus came into the world to save sinners." [1 Tim. 1:15] "He is
  • the end of the law for righteousness to every one that believeth."
  • [Rom. 10:4] "He died for our sins, and rose again for our
  • justification." [Rom. 4:25] "He loved us, and washed us from our
  • sins in his own blood." [Rev. 1:5] "He is mediator betwixt God
  • and us." [1 Tim. 2:5] "He ever liveth to make intercession for
  • us." [Heb. 7:24,25] From all which I gathered, that I must look
  • for righteousness in his person, and for satisfaction for my sins
  • by his blood; that what he did in obedience to his Father's law,
  • and in submitting to the penalty thereof, was not for himself, but
  • for him that will accept it for his salvation, and be thankful.
  • And now was my heart full of joy, mine eyes full of tears, and mine
  • affections running over with love to the name, people, and ways of
  • Jesus Christ.
  • {352} CHR. This was a revelation of Christ to your soul indeed;
  • but tell me particularly what effect this had upon your spirit.
  • HOPE. It made me see that all the world, notwithstanding all the
  • righteousness thereof, is in a state of condemnation. It made me
  • see that God the Father, though he be just, can justly justify the
  • coming sinner. It made me greatly ashamed of the vileness of my
  • former life, and confounded me with the sense of mine own ignorance;
  • for there never came thought into my heart before now that showed
  • me so the beauty of Jesus Christ. It made me love a holy life,
  • and long to do something for the honour and glory of the name of
  • the Lord Jesus; yea, I thought that had I now a thousand gallons
  • of blood in my body, I could spill it all for the sake of the Lord
  • Jesus.
  • {353} I saw then in my dream that Hopeful looked back and saw
  • Ignorance, whom they had left behind, coming after. Look, said he
  • to Christian, how far yonder youngster loitereth behind.
  • CHR. Ay, ay, I see him; he careth not for our company.
  • HOPE. But I trow it would not have hurt him had he kept pace with
  • us hitherto.
  • CHR. That is true; but I warrant you he thinketh otherwise.
  • HOPE. That, I think, he doth; but, however, let us tarry for him.
  • So they did.
  • {354} Then Christian said to him, Come away, man, why do you stay
  • so behind?
  • IGNOR. I take my pleasure in walking alone, even more a great deal
  • than in company, unless I like it the better.
  • Then said Christian to Hopeful, (but softly), Did I not tell you
  • he cared not for our company? But, however, said he, come up, and
  • let us talk away the time in this solitary place. Then directing
  • his speech to Ignorance, he said, Come, how do you? How stands it
  • between God and your soul now?
  • {355} Ignorance's hope, and the ground of it
  • IGNOR. I hope well; for I am always full of good motions, that come
  • into my mind, to comfort me as I walk.
  • CHR. What good motions? pray, tell us.
  • IGNOR. Why, I think of God and heaven.
  • CHR. So do the devils and damned souls.
  • IGNOR. But I think of them and desire them.
  • CHR. So do many that are never like to come there. "The soul of
  • the sluggard desireth, and hath nothing." [Prov. 13:4]
  • IGNOR. But I think of them, and leave all for them.
  • CHR. That I doubt; for leaving all is a hard matter: yea, a harder
  • matter than many are aware of. But why, or by what, art thou
  • persuaded that thou hast left all for God and heaven.
  • {356} IGNOR. My heart tells me so.
  • CHR. The wise man says, "He that trusts his own heart is a fool."
  • [Prov. 28:26]
  • IGNOR. This is spoken of an evil heart, but mine is a good one.
  • CHR. But how dost thou prove that?
  • IGNOR. It comforts me in hopes of heaven.
  • CHR. That may be through its deceitfulness; for a man's heart may
  • minister comfort to him in the hopes of that thing for which he
  • yet has no ground to hope.
  • IGNOR. But my heart and life agree together, and therefore my hope
  • is well grounded.
  • CHR. Who told thee that thy heart and life agree together?
  • IGNOR. My heart tells me so.
  • CHR. Ask my fellow if I be a thief! Thy heart tells thee so! Except
  • the Word of God beareth witness in this matter, other testimony is
  • of no value.
  • {357} IGNOR. But is it not a good heart that hath good thoughts?
  • and is not that a good life that is according to God's commandments?
  • CHR. Yes, that is a good heart that hath good thoughts, and that
  • is a good life that is according to God's commandments; but it is
  • one thing, indeed, to have these, and another thing only to think
  • so.
  • IGNOR. Pray, what count you good thoughts, and a life according to
  • God's commandments?
  • CHR. There are good thoughts of divers kinds; some respecting
  • ourselves, some God, some Christ, and some other things.
  • IGNOR. What be good thoughts respecting ourselves?
  • CHR. Such as agree with the Word of God.
  • {358} IGNOR. When do our thoughts of ourselves agree with the Word
  • of God?
  • CHR. When we pass the same judgment upon ourselves which the Word
  • passes. To explain myself--the Word of God saith of persons in
  • a natural condition, "There is none righteous, there is none that
  • doeth good." [Rom. 3] It saith also, that "every imagination of
  • the heart of man is only evil, and that continually." [Gen. 6:5]
  • And again, "The imagination of man's heart is evil from his youth."
  • [Rom. 8:21] Now then, when we think thus of ourselves, having
  • sense thereof, then are our thoughts good ones, because according
  • to the Word of God.
  • IGNOR. I will never believe that my heart is thus bad.
  • CHR. Therefore thou never hadst one good thought concerning thyself
  • in thy life. But let me go on. As the Word passeth a judgment
  • upon our heart, so it passeth a judgment upon our ways; and when
  • OUR thoughts of our hearts and ways agree with the judgment which
  • the Word giveth of both, then are both good, because agreeing
  • thereto.
  • {359} IGNOR. Make out your meaning.
  • CHR. Why, the Word of God saith that man's ways are crooked ways;
  • not good, but perverse. [Ps. 125:5, Prov. 2:15] It saith they
  • are naturally out of the good way, that they have not known it.
  • [Rom. 3] Now, when a man thus thinketh of his ways,--I say, when
  • he doth sensibly, and with heart-humiliation, thus think, then hath
  • he good thoughts of his own ways, because his thoughts now agree
  • with the judgment of the Word of God.
  • {360} IGNOR. What are good thoughts concerning God?
  • CHR. Even as I have said concerning ourselves, when our thoughts
  • of God do agree with what the Word saith of him; and that is, when
  • we think of his being and attributes as the Word hath taught, of
  • which I cannot now discourse at large; but to speak of him with
  • reference to us: Then we have right thoughts of God, when we
  • think that he knows us better than we know ourselves, and can see
  • sin in us when and where we can see none in ourselves; when we
  • think he knows our inmost thoughts, and that our heart, with all
  • its depths, is always open unto his eyes; also, when we think that
  • all our righteousness stinks in his nostrils, and that, therefore,
  • he cannot abide to see us stand before him in any confidence, even
  • in all our best performances.
  • {361} IGNOR. Do you think that I am such a fool as to think God can
  • see no further than I? or, that I would come to God in the best of
  • my performances?
  • CHR. Why, how dost thou think in this matter?
  • IGNOR. Why, to be short, I think I must believe in Christ for
  • justification.
  • CHR. How! think thou must believe in Christ, when thou seest
  • not thy need of him! Thou neither seest thy original nor actual
  • infirmities; but hast such an opinion of thyself, and of what
  • thou dost, as plainly renders thee to be one that did never see a
  • necessity of Christ's personal righteousness to justify thee before
  • God. How, then, dost thou say, I believe in Christ?
  • {362} IGNOR. I believe well enough for all that.
  • CHR. How dost thou believe?
  • IGNOR. I believe that Christ died for sinners, and that I shall be
  • justified before God from the curse, through his gracious acceptance
  • of my obedience to his law. Or thus, Christ makes my duties, that
  • are religious, acceptable to his Father, by virtue of his merits;
  • and so shall I be justified.
  • {363} CHR. Let me give an answer to this confession of thy faith:--
  • 1. Thou believest with a fantastical faith; for this faith is
  • nowhere described in the Word.
  • 2. Thou believest with a false faith; because it taketh justification
  • from the personal righteousness of Christ, and applies it to thy
  • own.
  • 3. This faith maketh not Christ a justifier of thy person, but
  • of thy actions; and of thy person for thy actions' sake, which is
  • false.
  • 4. Therefore, this faith is deceitful, even such as will leave
  • thee under wrath, in the day of God Almighty; for true justifying
  • faith puts the soul, as sensible of its condition by the law, upon
  • flying for refuge unto Christ's righteousness, which righteousness
  • of his is not an act of grace, by which he maketh for justification,
  • thy obedience accepted with God; but his personal obedience to the
  • law, in doing and suffering for us what that required at our hands;
  • this righteousness, I say, true faith accepteth; under the skirt
  • of which, the soul being shrouded, and by it presented as spotless
  • before God, it is accepted, and acquit from condemnation.
  • {364} IGNOR. What! would you have us trust to what Christ, in his
  • own person, has done without us? This conceit would loosen the
  • reins of our lust, and tolerate us to live as we list; for what
  • matter how we live, if we may be justified by Christ's personal
  • righteousness from all, when we believe it?
  • CHR. Ignorance is thy name, and as thy name is, so art thou; even
  • this thy answer demonstrateth what I say. Ignorant thou art of
  • what justifying righteousness is, and as ignorant how to secure thy
  • soul, through the faith of it, from the heavy wrath of God. Yea,
  • thou also art ignorant of the true effects of saving faith in this
  • righteousness of Christ, which is, to bow and win over the heart
  • to God in Christ, to love his name, his word, ways, and people,
  • and not as thou ignorantly imaginest.
  • HOPE. Ask him if ever he had Christ revealed to him from heaven.
  • {365} IGNOR. What! you are a man for revelations! I believe that
  • what both you, and all the rest of you, say about that matter, is
  • but the fruit of distracted brains.
  • HOPE. Why, man! Christ is so hid in God from the natural apprehensions
  • of the flesh, that he cannot by any man be savingly known, unless
  • God the Father reveals him to them.
  • {366} IGNOR. That is your faith, but not mine; yet mine, I doubt
  • not, is as good as yours, though I have not in my head so many
  • whimsies as you.
  • CHR. Give me leave to put in a word. You ought not so slightly
  • to speak of this matter; for this I will boldly affirm, even as my
  • good companion hath done, that no man can know Jesus Christ but by
  • the revelation of the Father; [Matt. 11:27] yea, and faith too,
  • by which the soul layeth hold upon Christ, if it be right, must be
  • wrought by the exceeding greatness of his mighty power; the working
  • of which faith, I perceive, poor Ignorance, thou art ignorant of.
  • [1 Cor. 12:3, Eph. 1:18,19] Be awakened, then, see thine own
  • wretchedness, and fly to the Lord Jesus; and by his righteousness,
  • which is the righteousness of God, for he himself is God, thou
  • shalt be delivered from condemnation.
  • {367} IGNOR. You go so fast, I cannot keep pace with you. Do you
  • go on before; I must stay a while behind.
  • Then they said--
  • Well, Ignorance, wilt thou yet foolish be,
  • To slight good counsel, ten times given thee?
  • And if thou yet refuse it, thou shalt know,
  • Ere long, the evil of thy doing so.
  • Remember, man, in time, stoop, do not fear;
  • Good counsel taken well, saves: therefore hear.
  • But if thou yet shalt slight it, thou wilt be
  • The loser, (Ignorance), I'll warrant thee.
  • Then Christian addressed thus himself to his fellow:--
  • CHR. Well, come, my good Hopeful, I perceive that thou and I must
  • walk by ourselves again.
  • {368} So I saw in my dream that they went on apace before,
  • and Ignorance he came hobbling after. Then said Christian to his
  • companion, It pities me much for this poor man, it will certainly
  • go ill with him at last.
  • HOPE. Alas! there are abundance in our town in his condition,
  • whole families, yea, whole streets, and that of pilgrims too; and
  • if there be so many in our parts, how many, think you, must there
  • be in the place where he was born?
  • CHR. Indeed the Word saith, "He hath blinded their eyes, lest they
  • should see", &c. But now we are by ourselves, what do you think
  • of such men? Have they at no time, think you, convictions of sin,
  • and so consequently fears that their state is dangerous?
  • HOPE. Nay, do you answer that question yourself, for you are the
  • elder man.
  • CHR. Then I say, sometimes (as I think) they may; but they being
  • naturally ignorant, understand not that such convictions tend to
  • their good; and therefore they do desperately seek to stifle them,
  • and presumptuously continue to flatter themselves in the way of
  • their own hearts.
  • {369} HOPE. I do believe, as you say, that fear tends much to men's
  • good, and to make them right, at their beginning to go on pilgrimage.
  • CHR. Without all doubt it doth, if it be right; for so says the
  • Word, "The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom." [Prov.
  • 1:7, 9:10, Job 28:28, Ps. 111:10]
  • {370} HOPE. How will you describe right fear?
  • CHR. True or right fear is discovered by three things:--
  • 1. By its rise; it is caused by saving convictions for sin.
  • 2. It driveth the soul to lay fast hold of Christ for salvation.
  • 3. It begetteth and continueth in the soul a great reverence of
  • God, his Word, and ways, keeping it tender, and making it afraid
  • to turn from them, to the right hand or to the left, to anything
  • that may dishonour God, break its peace, grieve the Spirit, or
  • cause the enemy to speak reproachfully.
  • HOPE. Well said; I believe you have said the truth. Are we now
  • almost got past the Enchanted Ground?
  • CHR. Why, art thou weary of this discourse?
  • HOPE. No, verily, but that I would know where we are.
  • {371} CHR. We have not now above two miles further to go thereon.
  • But let us return to our matter. Now the ignorant know not that
  • such convictions as tend to put them in fear are for their good,
  • and therefore they seek to stifle them.
  • HOPE. How do they seek to stifle them?
  • {372} CHR. 1. They think that those fears are wrought by the
  • devil, (though indeed they are wrought of God); and, thinking so,
  • they resist them as things that directly tend to their overthrow.
  • 2. They also think that these fears tend to the spoiling of their
  • faith, when, alas, for them, poor men that they are, they have none
  • at all! and therefore they harden their hearts against them.
  • 3. They presume they ought not to fear; and, therefore, in despite
  • of them, wax presumptuously confident.
  • 4. They see that those fears tend to take away from them their
  • pitiful old self-holiness, and therefore they resist them with all
  • their might.
  • {373} HOPE. I know something of this myself; for, before I knew
  • myself, it was so with me.
  • CHR. Well, we will leave, at this time, our neighbour Ignorance by
  • himself, and fall upon another profitable question.
  • HOPE. With all my heart, but you shall still begin.
  • CHR. Well then, did you not know, about ten years ago, one Temporary
  • in your parts, who was a forward man in religion then?
  • HOPE. Know him! yes, he dwelt in Graceless, a town about two miles
  • off of Honesty, and he dwelt next door to one Turnback.
  • {374} CHR. Right, he dwelt under the same roof with him. Well,
  • that man was much awakened once; I believe that then he had some
  • sight of his sins, and of the wages that were due thereto.
  • HOPE. I am of your mind, for, my house not being above three miles
  • from him, he would ofttimes come to me, and that with many tears.
  • Truly I pitied the man, and was not altogether without hope of him;
  • but one may see, it is not every one that cries, Lord, Lord.
  • CHR. He told me once that he was resolved to go on pilgrimage, as
  • we do now; but all of a sudden he grew acquainted with one Save-self,
  • and then he became a stranger to me.
  • {375} HOPE. Now, since we are talking about him, let us a little
  • inquire into the reason of the sudden backsliding of him and such
  • others.
  • CHR. It may be very profitable, but do you begin.
  • HOPE. Well, then, there are in my judgment four reasons for it:--
  • {376} 1. Though the consciences of such men are awakened, yet their
  • minds are not changed; therefore, when the power of guilt weareth
  • away, that which provoked them to be religious ceaseth, wherefore
  • they naturally turn to their own course again, even as we see the
  • dog that is sick of what he has eaten, so long as his sickness
  • prevails he vomits and casts up all; not that he doth this of a
  • free mind (if we may say a dog has a mind), but because it troubleth
  • his stomach; but now, when his sickness is over, and so his stomach
  • eased, his desire being not at all alienate from his vomit, he turns
  • him about and licks up all, and so it is true which is written,
  • "The dog is turned to his own vomit again." [2 Pet. 2:22] Thus
  • I say, being hot for heaven, by virtue only of the sense and fear
  • of the torments of hell, as their sense of hell and the fears of
  • damnation chills and cools, so their desires for heaven and salvation
  • cool also. So then it comes to pass, that when their guilt and
  • fear is gone, their desires for heaven and happiness die, and they
  • return to their course again.
  • {377} 2. Another reason is, they have slavish fears that do
  • overmaster them; I speak now of the fears that they have of men,
  • for "the fear of man bringeth a snare". [Prov. 29:25] So then,
  • though they seem to be hot for heaven, so long as the flames of
  • hell are about their ears, yet when that terror is a little over,
  • they betake themselves to second thoughts; namely, that it is good
  • to be wise, and not to run (for they know not what) the hazard of
  • losing all, or, at least, of bringing themselves into unavoidable
  • and unnecessary troubles, and so they fall in with the world again.
  • {378} 3. The shame that attends religion lies also as a block in
  • their way; they are proud and haughty; and religion in their eye
  • is low and contemptible, therefore, when they have lost their sense
  • of hell and wrath to come, they return again to their former course.
  • {379} 4. Guilt, and to meditate terror, are grievous to them.
  • They like not to see their misery before they come into it; though
  • perhaps the sight of it first, if they loved that sight, might make
  • them fly whither the righteous fly and are safe. But because they
  • do, as I hinted before, even shun the thoughts of guilt and terror,
  • therefore, when once they are rid of their awakenings about the
  • terrors and wrath of God, they harden their hearts gladly, and
  • choose such ways as will harden them more and more.
  • {380} CHR. You are pretty near the business, for the bottom of all
  • is for want of a change in their mind and will. And therefore they
  • are but like the felon that standeth before the judge, he quakes
  • and trembles, and seems to repent most heartily, but the bottom
  • of all is the fear of the halter; not that he hath any detestation
  • of the offence, as is evident, because, let but this man have his
  • liberty, and he will be a thief, and so a rogue still, whereas, if
  • his mind was changed, he would be otherwise.
  • {381} HOPE. Now I have showed you the reasons of their going back,
  • do you show me the manner thereof.
  • CHR. So I will willingly.
  • 1. They draw off their thoughts, all that they may, from the
  • remembrance of God, death, and judgment to come.
  • 2. Then they cast off by degrees private duties, as closet prayer,
  • curbing their lusts, watching, sorrow for sin, and the like.
  • 3. Then they shun the company of lively and warm Christians.
  • 4. After that they grow cold to public duty, as hearing, reading,
  • godly conference, and the like.
  • 5. Then they begin to pick holes, as we say, in the coats of some
  • of the godly; and that devilishly, that they may have a seeming
  • colour to throw religion (for the sake of some infirmity they have
  • espied in them) behind their backs.
  • 6. Then they begin to adhere to, and associate themselves with,
  • carnal, loose, and wanton men.
  • 7. Then they give way to carnal and wanton discourses in secret;
  • and glad are they if they can see such things in any that are
  • counted honest, that they may the more boldly do it through their
  • example.
  • 8. After this they begin to play with little sins openly.
  • 9. And then, being hardened, they show themselves as they are. Thus,
  • being launched again into the gulf of misery, unless a miracle of
  • grace prevent it, they everlastingly perish in their own deceivings.
  • {382} Now I saw in my dream, that by this time the Pilgrims were
  • got over the Enchanted Ground, and entering into the country of
  • Beulah, whose air was very sweet and pleasant, the way lying directly
  • through it, they solaced themselves there for a season. Yea, here
  • they heard continually the singing of birds, and saw every day the
  • flowers appear on the earth, and heard the voice of the turtle in
  • the land. [Isa. 62:4, Song of Solomon 2:10-12] In this country
  • the sun shineth night and day; wherefore this was beyond the Valley
  • of the Shadow of Death, and also out of the reach of Giant Despair,
  • neither could they from this place so much as see Doubting Castle.
  • Here they were within sight of the city they were going to, also
  • here met them some of the inhabitants thereof; for in this land
  • the Shining Ones commonly walked, because it was upon the borders
  • of heaven. In this land also, the contract between the bride and
  • the bridegroom was renewed; yea, here, "As the bridegroom rejoiceth
  • over the bride, so did their God rejoice over them." [Isa. 62:5]
  • Here they had no want of corn and wine; for in this place they met
  • with abundance of what they had sought for in all their pilgrimage.
  • [Isa. 62:8] Here they heard voices from out of the city, loud voices,
  • saying, "'Say ye to the daughter of Zion, Behold, thy salvation
  • cometh! Behold, his reward is with him!' Here all the inhabitants
  • of the country called them, 'The holy people, The redeemed of the
  • Lord, Sought out'", etc. [Isa. 62:11,12]
  • {383} Now as they walked in this land, they had more rejoicing than
  • in parts more remote from the kingdom to which they were bound; and
  • drawing near to the city, they had yet a more perfect view thereof.
  • It was builded of pearls and precious stones, also the street thereof
  • was paved with gold; so that by reason of the natural glory of the
  • city, and the reflection of the sunbeams upon it, Christian with
  • desire fell sick; Hopeful also had a fit or two of the same disease.
  • Wherefore, here they lay by it a while, crying out, because of their
  • pangs, If ye find my beloved, tell him that I am sick of love.
  • {384} But, being a little strengthened, and better able to bear
  • their sickness, they walked on their way, and came yet nearer and
  • nearer, where were orchards, vineyards, and gardens, and their gates
  • opened into the highway. Now, as they came up to these places,
  • behold the gardener stood in the way, to whom the Pilgrims said,
  • Whose goodly vineyards and gardens are these? He answered, They are
  • the King's, and are planted here for his own delight, and also for
  • the solace of pilgrims. So the gardener had them into the vineyards,
  • and bid them refresh themselves with the dainties. [Deut. 23:24]
  • He also showed them there the King's walks, and the arbours where
  • he delighted to be; and here they tarried and slept.
  • {385} Now I beheld in my dream that they talked more in their sleep
  • at this time than ever they did in all their journey; and being in
  • a muse thereabout, the gardener said even to me, Wherefore musest
  • thou at the matter? It is the nature of the fruit of the grapes
  • of these vineyards to go down so sweetly as to cause the lips of
  • them that are asleep to speak.
  • {386} So I saw that when they awoke, they addressed themselves to
  • go up to the city; but, as I said, the reflection of the sun upon
  • the city (for the city was pure gold) was so extremely glorious
  • that they could not, as yet, with open face behold it, but through
  • an instrument made for that purpose. So I saw, that as I went
  • on, there met them two men, in raiment that shone like gold; also
  • their faces shone as the light. [Rev. 21:18, 2 Cor. 3:18]
  • {387} These men asked the Pilgrims whence they came; and they told
  • them. They also asked them where they had lodged, what difficulties
  • and dangers, what comforts and pleasures they had met in the way;
  • and they told them. Then said the men that met them, You have but
  • two difficulties more to meet with, and then you are in the city.
  • {388} Christian then, and his companion, asked the men to go along
  • with them; so they told them they would. But, said they, you must
  • obtain it by your own faith. So I saw in my dream that they went
  • on together, until they came in sight of the gate.
  • {389} Now, I further saw, that betwixt them and the gate was a river,
  • but there was no bridge to go over: the river was very deep. At
  • the sight, therefore, of this river, the Pilgrims were much stunned;
  • but the men that went in with them said, You must go through, or
  • you cannot come at the gate.
  • {390} The Pilgrims then began to inquire if there was no other
  • way to the gate; to which they answered, Yes; but there hath not
  • any, save two, to wit, Enoch and Elijah, been permitted to tread
  • that path since the foundation of the world, nor shall, until the
  • last trumpet shall sound. [1 Cor. 15:51,52] The Pilgrims then,
  • especially Christian, began to despond in their minds, and looked
  • this way and that, but no way could be found by them by which they
  • might escape the river. Then they asked the men if the waters were
  • all of a depth. They said: No; yet they could not help them in
  • that case; for, said they, you shall find it deeper or shallower
  • as you believe in the King of the place.
  • *In the Resurrection of the Righteous. [Rev. 20:4-6]
  • {391} They then addressed themselves to the water and, entering,
  • Christian began to sink, and crying out to his good friend Hopeful,
  • he said, I sink in deep waters; the billows go over my head, all
  • his waves go over me! Selah.
  • {392} Christian's conflict at the hour of death
  • Then said the other, Be of good cheer, my brother, I feel the
  • bottom, and it is good. Then said Christian, Ah! my friend, the
  • sorrows of death hath compassed me about; I shall not see the land
  • that flows with milk and honey; and with that a great darkness and
  • horror fell upon Christian, so that he could not see before him.
  • Also here he in great measure lost his senses, so that he could
  • neither remember nor orderly talk of any of those sweet refreshments
  • that he had met with in the way of his pilgrimage. But all the
  • words that he spake still tended to discover that he had horror of
  • mind, and heart fears that he should die in that river, and never
  • obtain entrance in at the gate. Here also, as they that stood by
  • perceived, he was much in the troublesome thoughts of the sins that
  • he had committed, both since and before he began to be a pilgrim.
  • It was also observed that he was troubled with apparitions of
  • hobgoblins and evil spirits, for ever and anon he would intimate
  • so much by words. Hopeful, therefore, here had much ado to keep
  • his brother's head above water; yea, sometimes he would be quite
  • gone down, and then, ere a while, he would rise up again half dead.
  • Hopeful also would endeavour to comfort him, saying, Brother, I see
  • the gate, and men standing by to receive us: but Christian would
  • answer, It is you, it is you they wait for; you have been Hopeful
  • ever since I knew you. And so have you, said he to Christian.
  • Ah! brother! said he, surely if I was right he would now arise
  • to help me; but for my sins he hath brought me into the snare, and
  • hath left me. Then said Hopeful, My brother, you have quite forgot
  • the text, where it is said of the wicked, "There are no bands in
  • their death, but their strength is firm. They are not in trouble
  • as other men, neither are they plagued like other men. [Ps. 73:4,5]
  • These troubles and distresses that you go through in these waters
  • are no sign that God hath forsaken you; but are sent to try you,
  • whether you will call to mind that which heretofore you have received
  • of his goodness, and live upon him in your distresses.
  • {393} Then I saw in my dream, that Christian was as in a muse
  • a while. To whom also Hopeful added this word, Be of good cheer,
  • Jesus Christ maketh thee whole; and with that Christian brake out
  • with a loud voice, Oh, I see him again! and he tells me, "When
  • thou passest through the waters, I will be with thee, and through
  • the rivers, they shall not overflow thee." [Isa. 43:2] Then
  • they both took courage, and the enemy was after that as still as
  • a stone, until they were gone over. Christian therefore presently
  • found ground to stand upon, and so it followed that the rest of the
  • river was but shallow. Thus they got over. Now, upon the bank of
  • the river, on the other side, they saw the two shining men again,
  • who there waited for them; wherefore, being come out of the river,
  • they saluted them, saying, We are ministering spirits, sent forth
  • to minister for those that shall be heirs of salvation. Thus they
  • went along towards the gate.
  • {394} Now you must note that the city stood upon a mighty hill,
  • but the Pilgrims went up that hill with ease, because they had
  • these two men to lead them up by the arms; also, they had left their
  • mortal garments behind them in the river, for though they went in
  • with them, they came out without them. They, therefore, went up
  • here with much agility and speed, though the foundation upon which
  • the city was framed was higher than the clouds. They therefore
  • went up through the regions of the air, sweetly talking as they
  • went, being comforted, because they safely got over the river, and
  • had such glorious companions to attend them.
  • Now, now, look how the holy pilgrims ride, Clouds are their
  • chariots, angels are their guide: Who would not here for him all
  • hazards run, That thus provides for his when this world's done?
  • {395} The talk they had with the Shining Ones was about the glory
  • of the place; who told them that the beauty and glory of it was
  • inexpressible. There, said they, is the Mount Zion, the heavenly
  • Jerusalem, the innumerable company of angels, and the spirits of
  • just men made perfect. [Heb. 12:22-24] You are going now, said
  • they, to the paradise of God, wherein you shall see the tree of
  • life, and eat of the never-fading fruits thereof; and when you come
  • there, you shall have white robes given you, and your walk and talk
  • shall be every day with the King, even all the days of eternity.
  • [Rev. 2:7, 3:4, 21:4,5] There you shall not see again such things
  • as you saw when you were in the lower region upon the earth, to
  • wit, sorrow, sickness, affliction, and death, for the former things
  • are passed away. You are now going to Abraham, to Isaac, and Jacob,
  • and to the prophets--men that God hath taken away from the evil
  • to come, and that are now resting upon their beds, each one walking
  • in his righteousness. [Isa. 57:1,2, 65:17] The men then asked,
  • What must we do in the holy place? To whom it was answered, You
  • must there receive the comforts of all your toil, and have joy for
  • all your sorrow; you must reap what you have sown, even the fruit
  • of all your prayers, and tears, and sufferings for the King by the
  • way. [Gal. 6:7] In that place you must wear crowns of gold, and
  • enjoy the perpetual sight and vision of the Holy One, for there you
  • shall see him as he is. [1 John 3:2] There also you shall serve
  • him continually with praise, with shouting, and thanksgiving, whom
  • you desired to serve in the world, though with much difficulty,
  • because of the infirmity of your flesh. There your eyes shall
  • be delighted with seeing, and your ears with hearing the pleasant
  • voice of the Mighty One. There you shall enjoy your friends again
  • that are gone thither before you; and there you shall with joy
  • receive, even every one that follows into the holy place after
  • you. There also shall you be clothed with glory and majesty, and
  • put into an equipage fit to ride out with the King of Glory. When
  • he shall come with sound of trumpet in the clouds, as upon the
  • wings of the wind, you shall come with him; and when he shall sit
  • upon the throne of judgment; you shall sit by him; yea, and when
  • he shall pass sentence upon all the workers of iniquity, let them
  • be angels or men, you also shall have a voice in that judgment,
  • because they were his and your enemies. [1 Thes. 4:13-16, Jude
  • 1:14, Dan. 7:9,10, 1 Cor. 6:2,3] Also, when he shall again return
  • to the city, you shall go too, with sound of trumpet, and be ever
  • with him.
  • {396} Now while they were thus drawing towards the gate, behold a
  • company of the heavenly host came out to meet them; to whom it was
  • said, by the other two Shining Ones, These are the men that have
  • loved our Lord when they were in the world, and that have left all
  • for his holy name; and he hath sent us to fetch them, and we have
  • brought them thus far on their desired journey, that they may go
  • in and look their Redeemer in the face with joy. Then the heavenly
  • host gave a great shout, saying, "Blessed are they which are called
  • unto the marriage supper of the Lamb." [Rev. 19:9] There came out
  • also at this time to meet them, several of the King's trumpeters,
  • clothed in white and shining raiment, who, with melodious noises,
  • and loud, made even the heavens to echo with their sound. These
  • trumpeters saluted Christian and his fellow with ten thousand
  • welcomes from the world; and this they did with shouting, and sound
  • of trumpet.
  • {397} This done, they compassed them round on every side; some went
  • before, some behind, and some on the right hand, some on the left,
  • (as it were to guard them through the upper regions), continually
  • sounding as they went, with melodious noise, in notes on high: so
  • that the very sight was, to them that could behold it, as if heaven
  • itself was come down to meet them. Thus, therefore, they walked
  • on together; and as they walked, ever and anon these trumpeters,
  • even with joyful sound, would, by mixing their music with looks and
  • gestures, still signify to Christian and his brother, how welcome
  • they were into their company, and with what gladness they came to
  • meet them; and now were these two men, as it were, in heaven, before
  • they came at it, being swallowed up with the sight of angels, and
  • with hearing of their melodious notes. Here also they had the city
  • itself in view, and they thought they heard all the bells therein
  • to ring, to welcome them thereto. But above all, the warm and
  • joyful thoughts that they had about their own dwelling there, with
  • such company, and that for ever and ever. Oh, by what tongue or
  • pen can their glorious joy be expressed! And thus they came up to
  • the gate.
  • {398} Now, when they were come up to the gate, there was written over
  • it in letters of gold, "Blessed are they that do his commandments,
  • that they may have right to the tree of life, and may enter in
  • through the gates into the city." [Rev. 22:14]
  • {399} Then I saw in my dream that the Shining Men bid them call
  • at the gate; the which, when they did, some looked from above over
  • the gate, to wit, Enoch, Moses, and Elijah, &c., to whom it was
  • said, These pilgrims are come from the City of Destruction, for
  • the love that they bear to the King of this place; and then the
  • Pilgrims gave in unto them each man his certificate, which they
  • had received in the beginning; those, therefore, were carried in
  • to the King, who, when he had read them, said, Where are the men?
  • To whom it was answered, They are standing without the gate. The
  • King then commanded to open the gate, "That the righteous nation,"
  • said he, "which keepeth the truth, may enter in." [Isa. 26:2]
  • {400} Now I saw in my dream that these two men went in at the
  • gate: and lo, as they entered, they were transfigured, and they
  • had raiment put on that shone like gold. There was also that met
  • them with harps and crowns, and gave them to them--the harps to
  • praise withal, and the crowns in token of honour. Then I heard
  • in my dream that all the bells in the city rang again for joy, and
  • that it was said unto them, "ENTER YE INTO THE JOY OF YOUR LORD."
  • I also heard the men themselves, that they sang with a loud voice,
  • saying, "BLESSING AND HONOUR, AND GLORY, AND POWER, BE UNTO HIM
  • THAT SITTETH UPON THE THRONE, AND UNTO THE LAMB, FOR EVER AND EVER."
  • [Rev. 5:13]
  • {401} Now, just as the gates were opened to let in the men,
  • I looked in after them, and, behold, the City shone like the sun;
  • the streets also were paved with gold, and in them walked many
  • men, with crowns on their heads, palms in their hands, and golden
  • harps to sing praises withal.
  • {402} There were also of them that had wings, and they answered
  • one another without intermission, saying, "Holy, holy, holy is the
  • Lord." [Rev. 4:8] And after that they shut up the gates; which,
  • when I had seen, I wished myself among them.
  • {403} Now while I was gazing upon all these things, I turned my
  • head to look back, and saw Ignorance come up to the river side;
  • but he soon got over, and that without half that difficulty which
  • the other two men met with. For it happened that there was then
  • in that place, one Vain-hope, a ferryman, that with his boat helped
  • him over; so he, as the other I saw, did ascend the hill, to come
  • up to the gate, only he came alone; neither did any man meet him
  • with the least encouragement. When he was come up to the gate, he
  • looked up to the writing that was above, and then began to knock,
  • supposing that entrance should have been quickly administered to
  • him; but he was asked by the men that looked over the top of the
  • gate, Whence came you, and what would you have? He answered, I
  • have eat and drank in the presence of the King, and he has taught
  • in our streets. Then they asked him for his certificate, that they
  • might go in and show it to the King; so he fumbled in his bosom
  • for one, and found none. Then said they, Have you none? But the
  • man answered never a word. So they told the King, but he would
  • not come down to see him, but commanded the two Shining Ones that
  • conducted Christian and Hopeful to the City, to go out and take
  • Ignorance, and bind him hand and foot, and have him away. Then
  • they took him up, and carried him through the air to the door that
  • I saw in the side of the hill, and put him in there. Then I saw
  • that there was a way to hell, even from the gates of heaven, as
  • well as from the City of Destruction. So I awoke, and behold it
  • was a dream.
  • {404} The Conclusion.
  • Now, Reader, I have told my dream to thee;
  • See if thou canst interpret it to me,
  • Or to thyself, or neighbour; but take heed
  • Of misinterpreting; for that, instead
  • Of doing good, will but thyself abuse:
  • By misinterpreting, evil ensues.
  • Take heed, also, that thou be not extreme,
  • In playing with the outside of my dream:
  • Nor let my figure or similitude
  • Put thee into a laughter or a feud.
  • Leave this for boys and fools; but as for thee,
  • Do thou the substance of my matter see.
  • Put by the curtains, look within my veil,
  • Turn up my metaphors, and do not fail,
  • There, if thou seekest them, such things to find,
  • As will be helpful to an honest mind.
  • What of my dross thou findest there, be bold
  • To throw away, but yet preserve the gold;
  • What if my gold be wrapped up in ore?--
  • None throws away the apple for the core.
  • But if thou shalt cast all away as vain,
  • I know not but 'twill make me dream again.
  • End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Pilgrim's Progress, by John Bunyan
  • *** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PILGRIM'S PROGRESS ***
  • ***** This file should be named 131.txt or 131.zip *****
  • This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
  • http://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/131/
  • Produced by SeeWei Toh and Alan R. Light. HTML version by Al Haines.
  • Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
  • will be renamed.
  • Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
  • one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
  • (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
  • permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
  • set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
  • copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
  • protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
  • Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
  • charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
  • do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
  • rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
  • such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
  • research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
  • practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
  • subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
  • redistribution.
  • *** START: FULL LICENSE ***
  • THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
  • PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
  • To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
  • distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
  • (or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
  • Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
  • Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
  • http://gutenberg.net/license).
  • Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
  • electronic works
  • 1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
  • electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
  • and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
  • (trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
  • the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
  • all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
  • If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
  • Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
  • terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
  • entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
  • 1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
  • used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
  • agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
  • things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
  • even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
  • paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
  • Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
  • and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
  • works. See paragraph 1.E below.
  • 1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
  • or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
  • Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
  • collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
  • individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
  • located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
  • copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
  • works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
  • are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
  • Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
  • freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
  • this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
  • the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
  • keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
  • Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
  • 1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
  • what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
  • a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
  • the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
  • before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
  • creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
  • Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
  • the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
  • States.
  • 1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
  • 1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
  • access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
  • whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
  • phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
  • Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
  • copied or distributed:
  • This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
  • almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
  • re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
  • with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.net
  • 1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
  • from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
  • posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
  • and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
  • or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
  • with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
  • work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
  • through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
  • Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
  • 1.E.9.
  • 1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
  • with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
  • must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
  • terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
  • to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
  • permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
  • 1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
  • License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
  • work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
  • 1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
  • electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
  • prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
  • active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
  • Gutenberg-tm License.
  • 1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
  • compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
  • word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
  • distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
  • "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
  • posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.net),
  • you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
  • copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
  • request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
  • form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
  • License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
  • 1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
  • performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
  • unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
  • 1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
  • access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
  • that
  • - You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
  • the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
  • you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
  • owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
  • has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
  • Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
  • must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
  • prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
  • returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
  • sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
  • address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
  • the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
  • - You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
  • you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
  • does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
  • License. You must require such a user to return or
  • destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
  • and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
  • Project Gutenberg-tm works.
  • - You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
  • money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
  • electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
  • of receipt of the work.
  • - You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
  • distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
  • 1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
  • electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
  • forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
  • both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
  • Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
  • Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
  • 1.F.
  • 1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
  • effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
  • public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
  • collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
  • works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
  • "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
  • corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
  • property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
  • computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
  • your equipment.
  • 1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
  • of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
  • Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
  • Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
  • Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
  • liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
  • fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
  • LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
  • PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
  • TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
  • LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
  • INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
  • DAMAGE.
  • 1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
  • defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
  • receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
  • written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
  • received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
  • your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
  • the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
  • refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
  • providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
  • receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
  • is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
  • opportunities to fix the problem.
  • 1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
  • in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
  • WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
  • WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
  • 1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
  • warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
  • If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
  • law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
  • interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
  • the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
  • provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
  • 1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
  • trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
  • providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
  • with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
  • promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
  • harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
  • that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
  • or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
  • work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
  • Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
  • Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
  • Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
  • electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
  • including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
  • because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
  • people in all walks of life.
  • Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
  • assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
  • goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
  • remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
  • Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
  • and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
  • To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
  • and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
  • and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
  • Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
  • Foundation
  • The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
  • 501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
  • state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
  • Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
  • number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
  • http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
  • Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
  • permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
  • The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
  • Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
  • throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
  • 809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
  • business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
  • information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
  • page at http://pglaf.org
  • For additional contact information:
  • Dr. Gregory B. Newby
  • Chief Executive and Director
  • gbnewby@pglaf.org
  • Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
  • Literary Archive Foundation
  • Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
  • spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
  • increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
  • freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
  • array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
  • ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
  • status with the IRS.
  • The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
  • charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
  • States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
  • considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
  • with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
  • where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
  • SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
  • particular state visit http://pglaf.org
  • While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
  • have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
  • against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
  • approach us with offers to donate.
  • International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
  • any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
  • outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
  • Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
  • methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
  • ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
  • donations. To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
  • Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
  • works.
  • Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
  • concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
  • with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
  • Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
  • Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
  • editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
  • unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
  • keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
  • Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
  • http://www.gutenberg.net
  • This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
  • including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
  • Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
  • subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.